manual papu

[PI00060(E )09/95]

thirty-six pica chart:

File:01ctpie.exUpdate:Tue Sep 19 14:32:49 1995

*[PI00200(ALL)09/95]

thirty-six pica chart:


*[PI00560(ALL)05/95]

Table of Contents

Introductory Information ............................... 1

Safety Restraints .............................................. 9

Starting Your Escort .................................... 105

Warning Lights and Gauges ..................... 117

Instrument Panel Controls ........................ 135

Steering Column Controls ........................ 159

Features .......................................................... 169

Electronic Sound Systems ......................... 197

Driving Your Escort .................................... 223

Roadside Emergencies ................................ 243

Customer Assistance ................................... 259

Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 266

Accessories .................................................... 271

Servicing Your Escort ................................. 279

Quick Index .................................................. 353

Index ................................................................ 371

Service Station Information ...................... 388


1

Introductory Information

*[IN00300(ALL)04/95] Ford’s Commitment to You

*[IN00400(ALL)04/95] At Ford Motor Company, excellence is thecontinuous commitment to achieve the bestresult possible. It is dedication to learning whatyou want, determination to develop the rightconcept, and execution of that concept with care,precision, and attention to detail. In short,excellence means being the standard by whichothers are judged.

*[IN00500(ALL)04/95] Our Guiding Principles

*[IN00600(ALL)04/95] ❑Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, thequality of our products and services must beour number one priority.

*[IN00700(ALL)04/95] ❑You are the focus of everything we do. Ourwork must be done with you in mind,providing better products and services thanour competition.

*[IN00750(ALL)04/95] ❑Continuous improvement is essential to oursuccess. We must strive for excellence ineverything we do: in our products — in theirsafety and value — and in our services, ourhuman relations, our competitiveness, andour profitability.

*[IN00800(ALL)04/95] ❑Employee involvement is our way of life.We are a team. We must treat one anotherwith trust and respect.

*[IN00900(ALL)04/95] ❑Dealers and suppliers are our partners. Wemust maintain mutually beneficialrelationships with dealers, suppliers, and ourother business associates.

File:02ctine.exUpdate:Tue Sep 19 14:42:23 1995

2

*[IN01000(ALL)04/95] ❑ Integrity is never compromised. Our conductworldwide must be pursued in a manner thatis socially responsible and commands respectfor its integrity and for its positivecontributions to society.

*[IN01100(ALL)08/95] Things to Know About UsingThis Guide

*[IN01200(ALL)08/95] Congratulations on the purchase of your newvehicle. This guide has information about theequipment and the options for your new vehicle.You may not have bought all of the optionsavailable to you. If you do not know whichinformation applies to your vehicle, talk to yourdealer.

*[IN01300(ALL)08/95] This guide describes equipment and givesspecifications for equipment that was in effectwhen this guide was approved for printing. Fordmay discontinue models or change specificationsor design without any notice and withoutincurring obligation.

*[IN01400(ALL)08/95] Finding Information in This Guide

*[IN01500(ALL)08/95] After you have read this guide once, you willprobably return to it when you have a specificquestion or need additional information. To helpyou find specific information quickly, you canuse the Quick Index, Table of Contents, or theIndex.

*[IN01600(ALL)08/95] The Quick Index at the end of the bookprovides a page number following each itemwhich indicates where detailed information canbe found.


3

[IN01700(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle may not look exactly like thevehicles shown in the Quick Index illustrations.Some features and components shown in theillustrations may not apply to your particularvehicle. Your vehicle may also have equipmentthat is not illustrated or mentioned in the QuickIndex. If you do not know which illustratedfeatures and components apply to your vehicle,talk to your dealer.

*[IN01800(ALL)08/95] This guide has a table of contents at thebeginning of the book to show chapter titles.

*[IN01900(ALL)08/95] To use the Index, turn to the back of the bookand search in the alphabetical listing for theword that best describes the information youneed. If the word you chose is not listed, thinkof other related words and look them up. Wehave designed the Index so that you can findinformation under a technical term.

%*[IN02000(ALL)08/95] Canadian Owners — French Version

*[IN02100(ALL)08/95] French Owner Guides can be obtained from yourdealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company ofCanada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.

%*[IN02400(ALL)04/95] Your Maintenance Schedule andRecord Booklet

*[IN02500(ALL)03/95] The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet liststhe services that are most important for keepingyour vehicle in good condition. A record log isalso provided to help you keep track of allservices performed.


4

%*[IN02600(ALL)01/95] About the Warranties

*[IN02700(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is covered by three types ofwarranties: Basic Vehicle Warranty, ExtendedWarranties on certain parts, and EmissionsWarranties.

%*[IN03100(ALL)03/95] Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefullyto find out about your vehicle’s warranties andyour basic rights and responsibilities.

*[IN03250(ALL)03/95] If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, youcan get a new one free of charge. Contact anyFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, or refer to theaddresses and phone numbers on the first pageof this owner guide.

*[IN03700(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with an ElectronicPowertrain Control Module that limits engineand/or vehicle speeds with a cut-out mode topromote durability.

%*[IN04000(ALL)01/95] Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan

*[IN04100(ALL)01/94] If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you canbuy a Ford Extended Service Plan for yourvehicle. This optional contract provides serviceprotection for a longer period of time than thebasic warranty that comes with your vehicle.

*[IN04200(ALL)01/95] You do not have to buy this option when youbuy your vehicle. However, your option topurchase the Ford Extended Service Plan runsout after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See yourdealer for more details about the Ford ExtendedService Plan.

*[IN04250(ALL)01/95] If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did nottake advantage of the Ford Extended ServicePlan at the time of purchase, you may still beeligible. See your dealer for the details.


5

%*[IN06000(ALL)01/95] Breaking Your Vehicle In

*[IN06100(ALL)03/95] Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment orbreak-in period during the first 1,000 miles(1,600 km) that you drive it. During the break-inperiod, you need to pay careful attention to howyou drive your vehicle.

%*[IN06300(ALL)01/95] ❑Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehiclehas new brake linings, you should take thesesteps:

*[IN06400(ALL)01/95] — Watch traffic carefully so that you cananticipate when to stop.

*[IN06500(ALL)01/95] — Begin braking well in advance.

*[IN06600(ALL)01/95] — Apply the brakes gradually.

*[IN06700(ALL)01/95] The break-in period for new brake liningslasts for 100 miles (160 km) of city driving or1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway driving.

%*[IN06800(ALL)01/95] ❑Use only the type of engine oil that Fordrecommends. See Engine oil recommendationsin the Index. Do not use special “break-in”oils.


6

%*[IN07100(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Outside of YourVehicle

%*[IN07200(ALL)04/95] Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle

*[IN07300(ALL)04/95] Wash the outside of your vehicle, including theunderside, with a mild detergent.

*[IN07400(ALL)06/95] DO NOT:

*[IN07500(ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle with hot water

*[IN07600(ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle while it sits in directsunlight

*[IN07700(ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle while the body is hot

*[IN07800(ALL)07/95] Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damagethe paint, especially in hot weather. Wash yourvehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean.

*[IN07900(ALL)07/95] Take similar precautions if your vehicle isexposed to chemical industrial fallout.

*[IN08000(ALL)07/95] Paint damage resulting from fallout is notrelated to a defect in paint materials orworkmanship and therefore is not covered bywarranty. Ford, however, believes that continualimprovement in customer satisfaction is a highpriority. For this reason, Ford has authorized itsdealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, thesurfaces of new vehicles damaged byenvironmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comesfirst. Customers may be required to bring theirvehicle in for inspection by a Fordrepresentative.

*[IN08100(ALL)04/95] Polish your vehicle to remove harmful depositsand protect the finish.


7

%*[IN08200(ALL)04/95] Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts

*[IN08300(ALL)04/95] Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a milddetergent. Do not use steel wool, abrasivecleaners, fuel, or strong detergents.

%*[IN08400(ALL)04/95] Cleaning Plastic Parts

*[IN08500(ALL)04/95] Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts areplastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover ifnecessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routinecleaning.

*[IN08600(ALL)04/95] Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solventsor petroleum-based cleaners.

%*[IN08700(ALL)04/95] If you have your vehicle rustproofed, removeoversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oilremover. If rustproofing is not removed fromplastic and rubber parts, it can causedeterioration.


9

Safety Restraints

%*[SR00500(ALL)04/95] Important Safety Belt Information

*[SR00600(ALL)03/95] The use of safety belts helps to restrain you andyour passengers in case of a collision. In moststates and in Canada the law requires their use.

*[SR00700(ALL)08/95] Safety belts provide best restraint when:

*[SR00800(ALL)08/95] ❑ the seatback is upright

*[SR00900(ALL)08/95] ❑ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched)

*[SR01000(ALL)08/95] ❑ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips

*[SR01100(ALL)08/95] ❑ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest

*[SR01200(ALL)08/95] ❑ the knees are straight forward

[SR01300(ALL)06/95] To help you remember to fasten your safety belt,a warning light may come on and a chime maysound. See Safety belt warning light/chime in theWarning Lights and Gauges chapter.

*[SR01400(ALL)07/95] See the following sections in this chapter fordirections on how to properly use these safetybelts. Also see Safety Restraints for Children in thischapter for special instructions about usingsafety belts for children.

%*[SR02000(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Make sure that you and your passengerswear safety belts. Always drive and ridewith your seatback upright and the lapbelt snug and low across the hips.

File:03ctsre.exUpdate:Tue Sep 19 15:05:35 1995

10

[SR02100(ALL)08/95] RWARNING

Passengers should not be allowed to ridein the cargo area. Persons not riding in aseat with a fastened seat belt are muchmore likely to suffer serious injury in acollision. Cargo should always be securedto prevent it from shifting and causingdamage to the vehicle or harm topassengers.

*[SR02200(ALL)06/95] RWARNING

Never wear the shoulder belt under thearm. Never swing it around the neck overthe inside shoulder. Never use a singlebelt for more than one person or acrossmore than one seating position. Eachseating position in your vehicle has aspecific safety belt assembly which ismade up of one buckle and one tonguethat are designed to be used as a pair.Failure to follow these precautions couldincrease the risk and/or severity of injuryin a collision.


Never drive or ride with a twisted orjammed safety belt. If you cannot untwistor unjam the safety belt, see the nearestqualified technician immediately.


11


Children should always ride with theseatback in the fully upright position.When the seatback is not fully upright,there is a greater risk that the child willslide under the safety belt and beseriously injured in a collision.


Never let a passenger hold a child on hisor her lap while the vehicle is moving.The passenger cannot protect the childfrom injury in a collision.


Lock the doors of your vehicle beforedriving to lessen the risk of the doorcoming open in a collision.

[SR03100(E )07/93] Motorized Shoulder Belt Passive RestraintSystem (Not available on Canadianvehicles)

[SR03200(ALL)01/92] The front seat shoulder belts automatically adjustand together with the manual lap belt, help toprovide added restraint in the event of acollision.

[SR03300(ALL)04/93] While you drive, the shoulder belt adjusts toyour movement. However, if you brake hard,turn hard, or if your car receives an impact of5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the shoulder beltlocks and helps reduce your forward movement.


12

[SR03400(ALL)06/94]

half page art:0070061-E

The proper position of the front lap safety belt


The lap belts should fit snugly and as lowas possible around the hips, not aroundthe waist.

[SR03600(ALL)02/95] To operate the motorized shoulder belt:

[SR03700(ALL)02/94] 1. Get into your vehicle and close the door.Check to be sure the shoulder belt is latchedto the emergency release buckle.

[SR03750(ALL)11/92] 2. If it is not latched, pull the shoulder beltfrom the retractor and buckle it to theemergency release buckle. Note the twist inthe shoulder belt as in Figures 1 and 2.

*[SR03800(ALL)11/92] 3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.

[SR03900(ALL)02/95] A motor causes the shoulder belt to slide alongits track from the A-pillar to the B-pillar until itlocks in place.


13

[SR03950(ALL)03/93] If the belt does not lie flat against you, or thebelt has a twist in it at the retractor, unlatch thebelt at the buckle, remove twist, and relatch thebelt into the buckle.

[SR04000(ALL)06/94]


The shoulder belt sliding along its track


14

[SR04100(ALL)08/92]

half page art:0070042-B

The shoulder belt in the locked position

[SR04200(ALL)10/91]

half page art:0070043-A

The shoulder belt in the locked position


15

[SR04300(ALL)02/94] If the driver does not fasten the lap belt beforethe ignition key is turned to ON, the chime willsound for four (4) to eight (8) seconds. Thesafety belt warning indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster will also illuminate for one totwo minutes. In the unlikely event the shoulderbelt should stall before it reaches the B-pillar, theindicator light will flash continuously until theshoulder belt is in its locked position at theB-pillar. If the indicator lamp remainsilluminated for more than one minute, check tobe sure that both shoulder belts are latched tothe emergency release buckle. If the indicatorlamp remains illuminated with both front seatshoulder belts latched to the emergency releasebuckles, refer to the section titled What To Do IfYour Shoulder Belt Does Not Engage Properlybefore driving the vehicle.

[SR04400(ALL)04/93] Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulderonly. Never wear the shoulder belt under thearm. Never swing it around your neck over theinside shoulder. Never use a single belt for morethan one person. Failure to follow theseprecautions could increase the risk and/orseverity of injury in a collision.

[SR04500(ALL)02/95] When the ignition is in any position and thedoor is opened, the shoulder belt will moveforward to the A-pillar. This will allow ampleroom for the driver or passenger to exit fromthe vehicle. DO NOT use the belt as an assisthandle when entering or exiting the vehicle. Thedoor should not be opened while the vehicle isin motion.

[SR04550(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understandImportant Safety Belt Information atthe beginning of this chapter.


16


To reduce the risk of serious injury in acollision, always drive and ride with yourseatback upright and the lap belt snugand low across the hips.

[SR04800(ALL)07/95] Important For Your Safety

[SR04900(ALL)07/94] Before driving your vehicle, read the label onthe back of the sun visor or on the headlinerabove the driver’s seat (Canadian vehicles). Seethe following figures.

[SR05000(ALL)09/95]


Driver and passenger sun visor labels


17

[SR05050(ALL)06/94]


Label located on headliner (U.S. vehicles only)

[SR05150(ALL)06/94] An additional warning label is located on theheadliner (U.S. vehicles only). On vehiclesequipped with a moon roof, the label is locatedon the manual override access panel.

[SR05200(ALL)04/90] What To Do If Your Shoulder Belt DoesNot Engage Properly

[SR05300(ALL)02/95] If your shoulder belt does not move all the wayacross to the locked position on the B-pillar,follow these steps:

[SR05400(ALL)02/95] 1. Make sure the ignition switch is in theLOCK position.

[SR05500(ALL)03/91] 2. Make sure your door is fully closed. Theshoulder belt does not work if your door isopen and will remain in the forwardposition at the A-pillar.


18


The vehicle should not be driven unlessthe doors are fully closed and theshoulder belts are in the locked position.

[SR05700(ALL)10/89] 3. Unbuckle the shoulder belt by pressing thered emergency release button on the buckle.Then, reinsert the shoulder belt tongue intothe buckle until you hear a snap and feel thelatch engage.

[SR05800(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the key to the ON position.

[SR05900(ALL)10/89] 5. If the shoulder belt doesn’t move across you,turn the ignition switch to the LOCKposition and then release the shoulder beltfrom the buckle.

[SR06000(ALL)10/89] 6. Remove the access cap located in the lowerportion of the trim panel, rearward of thefront door opening.

[SR06100(ALL)12/89] 7. Pull the electrical wiring harness out throughthe access hole and disconnect the connector.The electrical wiring harness is located nearthe internal hex nut. To disconnect theconnector, pull the left and right sides apart.You may have to loosen the tape todisconnect the electrical connector.

[SR06200(ALL)10/91] 8. Then, insert the emergency handle into thehex nut inside the access hole. Theemergency handle is stored in the ownerportfolio in the glove compartment.


19

[SR06300(E )12/91]

full page art:0070045-B

Moving the shoulder belt manually — 2-door model


20

[SR06400(ALL)12/92]

full page art:0070044-B

Moving the shoulder belt manually — 4-door model


21

[SR06500(ALL)10/89] 9. Turn the emergency handle to move thebuckle rearward until you hear a click. Tomove the driver’s buckle, turn the handleclockwise. To move the passenger’s buckle,turn the handle counterclockwise.

[SR06600(ALL)03/91] 10. Reinsert the shoulder belt tongue into thebuckle.


If it is necessary to use the emergencyhandle to put the shoulder belt inposition, have the system serviced by aqualified technician as soon as possible.

[SR06800(ALL)04/94] Manual Front Lap Belts (U.S. vehiclesequipped with motorized passive restraint)

[SR06900(ALL)04/90] You should always wear the lap belt in additionto the shoulder belt.




Front and rear seat occupants, includingpregnant women, should wear both lapand shoulder belts for optimum protectionin a collision.

[SR07200(ALL)01/92] To fasten the lap belt: Pull the belt out of theretractor and bring it across your lap. Insert thetongue into the buckle until it snaps and locks inplace.


22

[SR07250(ALL)06/95] The lap belt retractor will allow the occupantfreedom of movement, locking tight only onhard braking, hard cornering or impacts ofapproximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more. Theretractor can be made to lock by jerking on thebelt.

[SR07275(ALL)08/95] Front passenger safety belts with dual lockingmode retractors can also be locked to tightlysecure a child safety seat.

[SR07285(ALL)06/95] Refer to the section Front Passenger Lap BeltRetractor (U.S. vehicles equipped with motorizedpassive restraint) or Front Passenger Lap/ShoulderBelt Retractor (Canadian 2-door vehicles only) in thischapter for complete information on vehiclesensitive and automatic locking modes.

[SR07300(ALL)06/94]


Buckling the lap belt


23

[SR07400(ALL)11/92]


The lap belt fastened

[SR07500(ALL)04/94]


The lap and shoulder belts in place


24

[SR07605(ALL)01/95] Front Passenger Lap Belt Retractor (U.S.vehicles equipped with motorized passiverestraint)

[SR07606(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual lockingmode retractor for the front seat passenger, andthe lap belt has the following label:

[SR07607(ALL)08/95]


Seat belt label

[SR07610(E )09/95] The retractor modes function as follows:

*[SR07615(ALL)08/95] Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode

[SR07620(ALL)06/95] In this operating mode, the lap belt retractor willallow the occupant freedom of movement,locking tight only on hard braking, hardcornering or impacts of approximately 5 mph(8 km/h) or more. The retractor can be made tolock by jerking on the belt.


25

%*[SR07625(ALL)08/95] Automatic locking mode

*[SR07630(ALL)06/95] In this operating mode, the lap belt retractor willremain locked and does not allow the occupantfreedom of movement. This mode provides thefollowing:

[SR07635(ALL)03/95] ❑A tight lap belt on the hips.

[SR07640(ALL)06/95] ❑Forward-facing child seat installation.


Rear-facing infant seats should never beplaced in the front seat.

[SR07645(ALL)01/95] This mode must be used when installing aforward-facing child seat on the front passengerseat. To switch the retractor from the emergencylocking mode, perform the following steps:

[SR07650(ALL)01/95] 1. Buckle the lap belt.

[SR07655(ALL)01/95] 2. Grasp the lap belt below the child seat label.Pull upward until all of the belt is extractedand a click is heard. At this time, the lapbelt retractor is in the automatic lockingmode (child restraint mode).

*[SR07660(ALL)07/95] 3. A clicking sound will contnue to be heard asthe belt is allowed to retract.

*[SR07665(ALL)03/95] 4. Pull down on the belt to remove slack in thebelt.

[SR07670(ALL)01/95] NOTE: When the lap belt is unbuckled andallowed to retract completely, theretractor will switch to the vehiclesensitive (emergency) locking mode.See the detailed instructions underSafety Seats for Children in thischapter.


26

[SR07700(ALL)04/90] Shoulder Belt Emergency Release Buttons

[SR07800(ALL)02/94] If the shoulder belt locks up in a collision, itmay stay locked. To unlock the belt, press theemergency release button on the shoulder beltbuckle. This allows the tongue to unlatch fromthe buckle. If the shoulder belt is unlatched andpartially retracted, a warning light in theinstrument panel lights up and remains on; thewarning chime sounds for about five (5) seconds.

[SR07900(ALL)02/95] To insert the tongue back into the shoulder beltbuckle, push it in until you hear a click.

[SR07950(ALL)03/93] If the belt does not lie flat against you, or thebelt has a twist in it at the retractor, unlatch thebelt at the buckle, remove twist, and relatch thebelt into the buckle.

[SR08000(ALL)10/89]


The emergency release button for the shoulder belt

[SR08100(ALL)04/93] After a collision, refer to Safety Belt Maintenancein this section.


27

[SR08200(ALL)06/94] If your shoulder belts stop working after acollision, the fuel pump shut-off switch mayhave been triggered. Minor parking lot bumpingand severe road impacts (such as potholes) maytrigger the switch even when there is noapparent body damage. In many instances, youmight not even know that the switch has beentriggered. The shut-off switch cuts power to themotors that move the shoulder belts in additionto stopping the flow of fuel to the engine. Toreset the switch, see Engine, starting after acollision in the Index.

[SR08300(ALL)04/93] If your shoulder belts are not working properly,get your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

[SR08400(ALL)04/93] If the fuel pump shut-off switch is not the causefor the shoulder belt not moving, have thesystem serviced by a qualified technician as soonas possible.


If the shoulder belt is released from theemergency release buckle, store the tongueend away from the seat tracks. Failure todo this may result in the seat belt beingcut or torn when the seat is adjustedforward or back. Any damaged shoulderbelt must be replaced.

[SR08500(E )07/93] Manual Front Lap and Shoulder Belt(Available only on Canadian vehicles)

[SR08580(E )08/95] While in motion, the combination lap andshoulder belt adjusts to your movement.However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or ifyour vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph(8 km/h) or more, the lap and shoulder beltlocks and helps reduce your forward movement.The retractor can be made to lock by jerking onthe belt.


28

[SR08590(E )08/95] Front passenger safety belts with dual lockingmode retractors can also be locked to tightlysecure a child safety seat.

*[SR08700(E )05/94] After you get into your vehicle, close the doorand lock it. Then adjust the driver or passengerseat to the position that suits you best.

[SR08800(E )07/95] To fasten the belt, find the long strap of the belt,pull it across your shoulder and chest, and insertthe tongue into the proper buckle on your seatuntil you hear a snap and feel it lock. Be sure touse the correct buckle and check to make surethe tongue is securely fastened to the buckle.

[SR08807(E )01/95]

quarter page art:0070003-A

Fastening the front seat lap and shoulder belt

*[SR08808(E )07/95] RWARNING


[SR08810(E )03/95] RWARNING

Front and rear seat occupants, includingpregnant women, should wear both lapand shoulder belts for optimum protectionin a collision.


29

*[SR08811(E )05/95] RWARNING

Use the shoulder belt on the outsideshoulder only. Never wear the shoulderbelt under the arm. Never swing it aroundthe neck over the inside shoulder. Neveruse a single belt for more than oneperson. Failure to follow these precautionscould increase the risk and/or severity ofinjury in a collision.

[SR08812(E )01/95] Front Passenger Lap/Shoulder BeltRetractor (Canadian 2-door vehicles only)

[SR08825(E )08/95] Your vehicle is equipped with one of two frontpassenger lap belts depending upon when yourvehicle was built.

[SR08830(E )08/95] If your vehicle is equipped with a dual lockingmode retractor for the front seat passenger, thelap belt will have the following label:

[SR08835(E )08/95]

17-1/2 pica art:0070267-B

Seat belt label


30

[SR08840(E )08/95] For vehicles equipped with a dual locking moderetractor for the front seat passenger, theretractor modes function as follows:

[SR08845(E )08/95] Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking moderetractors

[SR08850(E )08/95] The lap/shoulder belt retractor will allow theoccupant freedom of movement, locking tightonly on hard braking, hard cornering or impactsof approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more. Theretractor can be made to lock by jerking on thebelt.

[SR08855(E )08/95] Adjust the lap part of the belt by pulling up onthe shoulder belt until the lap belt fits snuglyand as low as possible around your hips.

%*[SR08860(E )08/95] Automatic locking mode

[SR08865(E )08/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder beltretractor will be automatically locked and remainlocked when the combination lap/shouldersafety belt is buckled, and does not allow theoccupant freedom of movement. This modeprovides the following:

*[SR08870(E )08/95] ❑A tight lap/shoulder belt fit on the occupant.

*[SR08875(E )08/95] ❑Child seat or infant carrier installationrestraint.

*[SR08880(E )08/95] RWARNING

Rear-facing infant seats should never beplaced in the front seats.


31

[SR08885(E )08/95] This mode must be used when installing aforward-facing child safety seat on the frontpassenger seat. To switch the retractor from theemergency locking mode to the automaticlocking mode, perform the following steps:

*[SR08890(E )08/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt.

*[SR08895(E )08/95] 2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt andpull downward until all of the belt isextracted, and when allowed to retract, aclicking sound will be heard. At this time,the belt retractor is in the automatic lockingmode (child restraint mode).

*[SR08900(E )08/95] 3. A clicking sound will continue to be heardas the belt is allowed to retract. Thisindicates that the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode.

[SR08905(E )08/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulderbelt is unbuckled and allowed toretract completely, the retractor willswitch back to the vehicle sensitive(emergency) locking mode. See thedetailed instructions under Safety Seatsfor Children in this chapter.


32

[SR08910(E )08/95] If your vehicle is not equipped with a duallocking mode retractor for the front seatpassenger, the lap belt will have the followinglabel:

[SR08915(E )08/95]

17-1/2 pica art:0070264-A

Seat belt label

[SR08935(E )08/95] Instructions for using a locking clip to securechild safety seats with manual lap and shouldersafety belts are provided later in this chapter.


33

[SR08940(E )08/95] Front Passenger Lap/Shoulder BeltRetractor (Canadian vehicles — 4-doorsedan, 4-door hatchback and wagon only)

[SR08945(E )08/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual lockingmode retractor for the front seat passenger, andthe lap belt has the following label:

[SR08950(E )08/95]


Seat belt label

[SR08955(E )06/95] Dual locking mode passenger seat lap beltretractor

[SR08960(E )06/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual lockingmode retractor on the lap belt part of thelap/shoulder belt for the front seat passenger.The retractor modes function as follows:


34

*[SR08965(E )08/95] Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode

[SR08970(E )06/95] In this operating mode, the lap belt retractor willallow the occupant freedom of movement,locking tight only on hard braking, hardcornering or impacts of approximately 5 mph(8 km/h) or more. The retractor can be made tolock by jerking on the belt.

%*[SR08975(E )08/95] Automatic locking mode

*[SR08980(E )06/95] In this operating mode, the lap belt retractor willremain locked and does not allow the occupantfreedom of movement. This mode provides thefollowing:

[SR08985(E )06/95] ❑A tight lap belt on the hips

[SR08990(E )06/95] ❑Forward-facing child seat installation.

*[SR09000(E )09/95] RWARNING


[SR09005(E )06/95] This mode must be used when installing aforward-facing child seat on the front passengerseat. To switch the retractor from the emergencylocking mode to the automatic locking mode,perform the following steps:

*[SR09010(E )08/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt.

*[SR09015(E )06/95] 2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt below thechild seat label. Pull upward until all of thebelt is extracted and a click is heard. At thistime, the lap belt retractor is in theautomatic locking mode (child restraintmode).

*[SR09020(E )07/95] 3. A clicking sound will contnue to be heard asthe belt is allowed to retract.

[SR09025(E )06/95] 4. Push down on the child seat while you pulldown on the belt to remove slack in the belt.


35

*[SR09030(E )08/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulderbelt is unbuckled and allowed toretract completely, the retractor willswitch to the vehicle sensitive(emergency) locking mode. See thedetailed instructions under Safety Seatsfor Children in this chapter.

[SR09600(E )03/91]


Combination lap and shoulder belt with a fixed tongue(available only on Canadian vehicles)


36

[SR09700(E )06/93] Rear Seat Entry (Canadian 2-doorhatchback models)

[SR09800(E )08/92]


Rear seat entry

[SR09900(E )10/89] The slide bar on the safety belt system isdesigned to make it easier to enter and exit fromthe rear seat and to help front seat passengersreach the belt. To enter the rear seat:

[SR10000(E )12/89] ❑Move the safety belt out of the way with theslide bar. (The belt should be at the front endof the slide bar when the belt is in use.)

[SR10100(E )10/89] ❑Enter the rear seat in front of the safety belt.


37

[SR10200(ALL)12/89] Rear Lap and Shoulder Belts

[SR10430(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle is equipped with rear seat safetybelts containing a cinch tongue, and the rearoutboard seat safety belts will have thefollowing label:

[SR10440(ALL)08/95]


Rear seat belt label

[SR10445(ALL)03/95] Before you fasten a combination lap andshoulder belt having a cinch tongue, you mayhave to lengthen the lap belt portion of it. Tolengthen the lap belt, pull some webbing out ofthe retractor. While holding the webbing belowthe tongue, grasp the tip (metal portion) of thetongue parallel to the webbing and slide thetongue upward.

*[SR10450(ALL)01/95] NOTE: If you grasp the tongue by the tonguecover to lengthen the belt, the tonguecover will grab the webbing, making itdifficult to slide.


38

[SR10460(ALL)01/95]


Adjusting the cinch tongue rear combination lap andshoulder belt

[SR10465(ALL)01/95] While in motion, the combination lap andshoulder belt adjusts to your movement.However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or ifyour vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph(8 km/h) or more, the lap and shoulder beltlocks and helps reduce your forward movement.

[SR10475(ALL)06/95] To fasten a rear outboard belt, pull thecombination lap and shoulder belt from theretractor so that the shoulder belt portion of thesafety belt crosses your shoulder and chest. Besure the belt is not twisted. If the belt is twisted,remove the twist. (For instructions on how toremove a twist, see the How to Untwist or Unjama Safety Belt Retractor section in this chapter.)Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle foryour seating position until you hear a snap and


39

feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securelyfastened to the buckle. Adjust the lap beltportion of the safety belt by pulling up on theshoulder belt until the lap belt fits snugly and aslow as possible around your hips.

[SR10500(ALL)10/91]


The rear lap and shoulder belt fastened


Front and rear seat occupants, includingpregnant women, should wear safety beltsfor optimum protection in an accident.


40


Use the shoulder belt on the outsideshoulder only. Never wear the shoulderbelt under the arm. Never swing it aroundthe neck over the inside shoulder. Neveruse a single belt for more than oneperson. Failure to follow these precautionscould increase the risk and/or severity ofinjury in a collision.

*[SR11000(ALL)03/95] Due to folding rear seats, sometimes the bucklesand tongues toward the center of the vehiclemay be hidden by the rear edge of the seatcushion. Pull them out so they will be accessible.

[SR11050(ALL)08/95] To unfasten the belt

[SR11100(ALL)08/95] 1. Push the release button on the buckle. Thisallows the tongue to unlatch from thebuckle.

[SR11300(ALL)08/92]

half page art:0070047-C

Unfastening the safety belts for the center seating position


41

[SR11450(ALL)01/95]

one third page art:0070270-A

Unfastening the outboard rear lap/shoulder belt

[SR11500(ALL)07/95] 2. While the belt retracts, guide the tongue toits original position to prevent it fromstriking you or the vehicle.

[SR11540(ALL)01/95] Instructions for securing child safety seats withrear manual lap and shoulder safety belts withcinch tongues are provided later in this chapteralso.

%*[SR11600(ALL)08/95] How to Untwist or Unjam a Safety BeltRetractor

[SR11700(ALL)06/95] If you should jam the lap belt retractor byallowing the belt to retract when it is twisted,you can free the webbing with this procedure.

*[SR11800(ALL)08/95] 1. Pull on the belt with both hands to tighten iton the retractor spool.

*[SR11900(ALL)08/95] 2. Feed the belt back into the retractor until itis completely retracted. Repeat previous stepif necessary.

*[SR11920(ALL)08/95] 3. Pull the belt out of its holder as far as it willgo and untwist the belt or remove the objectthat is jamming the belt. Let the belt retract.

*[SR11940(ALL)08/95] 4. Then, pull the belt out and let it retractseveral times to make sure that the beltworks properly.


42

[SR12000(ALL)09/95] Procedure to Correct a Twisted Safety Beltat the “D” Ring (if so equipped) Frontand/or Rear Outboard Seating Positions

*[SR12050(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The restraint system shown in thefollowing figures may be different thanthe restraint system in your vehicle.However, use these figures and thisprocedure to correct a twisted safetybelt at any outboard seating positionthat has a “D” ring.

[SR12055(ALL)06/95] NOTE: The following illustrations show thefront driver’s seat safety belt. Yourvehicle may not have a “D” ring at theindicated position.

[SR12075(ALL)06/95]



43

*[SR12100(ALL)05/95] 1. Grasp the belt webbing at the “D” ring. SeeFigure 2.

[SR12125(ALL)06/95]

half page art:0060599-D

*[SR12175(ALL)05/95] 2. Rotate and fold the belt webbing over itselfas required to remove the twist.

*[SR12200(ALL)08/95] 3. Feed the folded portion of the belt throughthe “D” ring.


44

*[SR12225(ALL)05/95] 4. When completed, the safety belt should looklike Figure 3.

[SR12250(ALL)06/95]



45

[SR12300(ALL)06/95] Procedure to Correct a Rotated Tongue onthe Safety Belt (Front and/or rear outboardseating positions)

*[SR12325(ALL)04/95] NOTE: The restraint system shown in thefollowing figures may be different thanthe restraint system in your vehicle.However, use these figures and thisprocedure to correct a rotated tongueon the safety belt at any seatingposition that has a “D” ring.

[SR12350(ALL)06/95]



46

[SR12400(ALL)06/95] 1. Grasp the belt tongue and pull down on thebelt webbing closest to you to form a loopthrough the upper (narrow and longer) slotin the tongue. See Figure 5.

[SR12425(ALL)06/95]


[SR12475(ALL)06/95] 2. Working within the upper slot, rotate andfold the belt webbing over itself as requiredto remove the twist.

[SR12500(ALL)06/95] 3. Pull the excess belt webbing back throughthe upper slot in the tongue.


47

[SR12525(ALL)06/95] 4. Repeat the above steps to complete theremoval of the twist at the lower (wider andshorter) slot in the tongue. See Figure 6.

[SR12575(ALL)06/95]


*[SR12600(ALL)06/95] 5. When completed, the safety belt should looklike Figure 3.


48

[SR12620(ALL)06/95] Rear Lap Belt




Be sure the lap belt is fitted snugly and aslow as possible around the hips, notaround the waist. Failure to do so mayincrease the risk of injury in the event ofa collision.

[SR12660(ALL)06/95] Before you fasten your lap belt, you may needto lengthen it.

[SR12680(ALL)06/95] To lengthen the belt, position the belt tongue ata right angle to the belt. Pull the belt tongueover your lap until it reaches the buckle.

*[SR12690(ALL)06/95] To fasten the belt, pull the belt across your hipsand insert the tongue into the correct buckle onyour seat until you hear a snap and feel it lock.Make sure the buckle is securely fastened.

[SR12825(ALL)10/91] Adjust the belt so that it fits snugly around yourhips, as low as possible.

[SR12850(ALL)10/91] If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it andrepeat the procedure above. If you need toshorten the belt, pull on the loose end of thewebbing.

[SR12875(ALL)12/89] To unfasten the belt, push the release button onthe end of the buckle. This allows the tongue tounlatch from the buckle. Because the center lapbelt does not have a retractor, it should beshortened and fastened when not in use.


49

%*[SR12876(ALL)08/95] Safety Belt Extension Assembly[SR12878(ALL)08/95] For some people, the safety belt may be too

short even when it is fully extended. You canadd about eight inches (20 cm) to the belt lengthwith a safety belt extension assembly. Safety beltextensions are available from your dealer.

*[SR12880(ALL)08/95] Use only extensions manufactured by the samesupplier as the safety belt. Manufactureridentification is located at the end of thewebbing on the label. Also, use the safety beltextension only if the safety belt is too short foryou when fully extended. Do not use extensionto change the fit of the shoulder belt across thetorso.


Failure to follow these instructions willaffect the performance of the safety beltsand increase the risk of personal injury.

%*[SR12884(ALL)08/95] Safety Belt Maintenance*[SR12886(ALL)08/95] Check the safety belt systems periodically to

make sure that they work properly and are notdamaged.

%*[SR12888(ALL)08/95] All safety belt assemblies, including retractors,buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies(slide bar) (if equipped), child safety seat tetherbracket assemblies (if equipped), and attachinghardware, should be inspected after anycollision. Ford recommends that all safety beltassemblies used in vehicles involved in acollision be replaced. However, if the collisionwas minor and a qualified technician finds thatthe belts do not show damage and continue tooperate properly, they do not need to bereplaced. Safety belt assemblies not in useduring a collision should also be inspected andreplaced if either damage or improper operationis noted.


50

%*[SR12889(ALL)06/95] Cleaning the Safety Belts

*[SR12901(ALL)06/95] Clean the safety belts with any mild soapsolution that is recommended for cleaningupholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye thebelt webbing because this may weaken it.

%*[SR12905(ALL)06/95] Air Bag Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS)

[SR12910(ALL)02/94] The driver and right front passenger air bag areSupplemental Restraint Systems (SRS), providedat these seating positions in addition to thelap/shoulder belt and are designed tosupplement the protection provided to properlybelted occupants in moderate to severe frontalcollisions. The supplemental air bag system doesnot provide restraint to the lower body.

%*[SR12920(ALL)05/95] The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts


Safety belts must be worn by all vehicleoccupants to be properly restrained andhelp reduce the risk of injury in acollision.


All occupants of the vehicle, including thedriver, should always wear their safetybelts, even when an air bag SupplementalRestraint System is provided.


51

*[SR12940(ALL)01/95] There are four very important reasons to usesafety belts even with an air bag system. Useyour safety belts to:

*[SR12950(ALL)01/95] ❑help keep you in the proper position (awayfrom the air bag) when it inflates

*[SR12960(ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side orrear impact collisions, because an air bag isnot designed to inflate in such situations

*[SR12970(ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisionsthat are not severe enough to activate thesupplemental air bag

*[SR12980(ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of being thrown from yourvehicle

%*[SR12990(ALL)01/95] The Importance of Being Properly Seated

*[SR13000(ALL)05/95] In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremelyfast to help provide additional protection foryou. In order to do this, the air bag must inflatewith considerable force. If you are not seated ina normal riding position with your back againstthe seatback, the air bag may not protect youproperly and could possibly hurt you as itinflates.


If a passenger is not properly seated andrestrained, an inflating air bag could causeserious injury.




52

*[SR13005(ALL)07/95] In rear-facing infant seats, the infant’s head iscloser to the air bag. The force of the rapidlyinflating air bag could push the top of therear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback orcenter armrests (if so equipped), or centerconsole (if so equipped). REAR-FACINGINFANT CARRIERS MUST ALWAYS BESECURED IN THE REAR SEAT, and other childsafety seats and infant seats should be secured inthe rear seat whenever possible.

*[SR13006(ALL)07/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a right frontpassenger air bag. Air bags deploy with greatforce, faster than the blink of an eye. Frontpassengers, especially children and small adults,must never sit on the front edge of the seat,stand near the glove compartment of theinstrument panel, or lean over near the air bagcover when the vehicle is moving. All occupantsshould sit with their backs against the seatback,move the seat to the most rearward position ifpossible and use the safety belts. Childrenweighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always shoulduse child or infant seats.


When using forward-facing child seatsmove the passenger seat as far back fromthe instrument panel as possible. NEVERSECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATSIN THE FRONT SEAT.

*[SR13008(ALL)08/95] The force of the rapidly inflating passenger airbag could push the top of the rear-facing seatagainst the vehicle seatback, armrests or console.Rear-facing infant seats must always be securedin the rear seat.


53


Do not place objects or mount equipmenton or near the air bag cover on thesteering wheel or in front seat areas thatmay come in contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow this instruction mayincrease the risk of personal injury in theevent of a collision.

%*[SR13010(ALL)01/95] How the Air Bag Supplemental RestraintSystem Operates

*[SR13020(ALL)09/95] The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint Systemconsists of the Driver and Passenger air bags,impact sensors, a system diagnostic module, areadiness light and tone, and the electricalwiring which connects the components. Thediagnostic module monitors its own internalcircuits and the supplemental air bag electricalsystem readiness, including crash sensors, thesystem wiring, the air bag readiness light, airbag backup power, and the supplemental air bagignitors.

*[SR13030(ALL)08/95] The driver air bag is in the center of the steeringwheel. The front passenger seat air bag islocated in the center section of the instrumentpanel ledge above the glove compartment. Bothair bags are designed to stay out of sight untilthey are activated.


54

[SR13035(ALL)06/94]


The location of the air bag and warning labels

*[SR13037(ALL)07/95] If a collision occurs, the sensors sense theseverity of the impact and activate the air bags ifnecessary. The air bag system is designed todeploy in frontal and front-angled collisionsmore severe than hitting a parked vehicle (ofsimilar size and weight) head-on at about28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system sensesthe crash severity rather than vehicle speed,some frontal collisions at speeds above 28 mph(45 km/h) will not inflate the air bag.

*[SR13039(ALL)07/95] When the sensors activate the system, the airbags inflate rapidly, filling with non-toxicnitrogen gas in a fraction of a second.Immediately after inflation, the air bags deflateby releasing the nitrogen gas through vent holes.The whole process takes place in a matter ofseconds.


55


Air bag system components get hot afterinflation. Do not touch them afterinflation.

[SR13043(ALL)09/95]


Inflated driver side air bag


56

[SR13045(ALL)09/95]


Inflated passenger side air bag


If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAGWILL NOT FUNCTION AGAIN ANDMUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. Ifthe air bag is not replaced, the unrepairedarea will increase the risk of injury in acollision.

*[SR13048(ALL)07/95] To ensure that the air bag system will operate asintended in a crash, the system is equipped witha diagnostic module, which controls a readinesslamp and a warning tone. The diagnosticmodule monitors its own circuits, the air bagelectrical system, the air bag readiness light, theair bag power, and the air bag inflators.

*[SR13049(ALL)06/95] The air bag system uses a readiness light on theinstrument cluster or a tone to indicate thecondition of the system. When you turn theignition to the ON position, this light will


57

illuminate for approximately six (6) seconds andthen turn off. This indicates that the system isoperating normally. NOTE: Maintenance of theair bag system is not required.

%*[SR13050(ALL)06/95] A problem with the system is indicated by oneor more of the following:

*[SR13055(ALL)06/95] ❑ the readiness light will either flash or stay lit,

*[SR13060(ALL)06/95] ❑or it will not light immediately after ignitionis turned on,

*[SR13065(ALL)06/95] ❑or a group of five beeps will be heard. Thetone pattern will repeat periodically until theproblem and light are repaired.

*[SR13090(ALL)08/95] If any of these things happen, have the air bagsystem serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer immediately. Unless serviced, the air bagSupplemental Restraint System may not functionproperly in the event of a collision.


Do not attempt to service, repair, ormodify the Air Bag SupplementalRestraint System or its fuses. See yourFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

%*[SR13260(ALL)05/95] Disposal of air bags or air bag equippedvehicles

*[SR13270(ALL)06/95] For disposal of air bags or air bag equippedvehicles, see your local Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer. Air bags MUST be disposed of byqualified personnel.

[SR13273(ALL)08/95] Service and information labels

[SR13275(ALL)08/95] Service and information labels are attached tothe sun visor, on the headliner above thedriver’s sun visor (Canadian vehicles), and nearthe radiator support in the engine compartment.


58

%*[SR14800(ALL)05/95] Safety Restraints for Children

*[SR14810(ALL)02/95] In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by lawto use safety restraints for children. If smallchildren ride in your vehicle — this generallyincludes children who are four years old oryounger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) orless — you must put them in safety seats thatare made specially for children. Safety beltsalone do not provide maximum protection forthese children. Check your local and state lawsfor specific requirements.


Never let a passenger hold a child on hisor her lap while the vehicle is moving.The passenger cannot protect the childfrom injury in a collision.


To prevent the risk of injury, make surechildren sit where they can be properlyrestrained.


Do not allow people to ride in any area ofyour vehicle that is not equipped withseats and safety belts.


Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a safety belt properly.


59


It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled.

*[SR14835(ALL)06/95] When possible, put children in the rear seat ofyour vehicle. Accident statistics suggest thatchildren are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seating positions than in the frontseating positions.


Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’sinstructions included with the safety seatyou put in your vehicle. If you do notinstall and use the safety seat properly,the child may be injured in a sudden stopor collision.


Never leave a child unattended in yourvehicle.


Safety belts and seats can become hot in avehicle that has been closed up in sunnyweather; they could burn a small child.Check seat covers and buckles before youplace a child anywhere near them.


60

%*[SR15650(ALL)01/95] Safety Seats for Children

*[SR15700(ALL)05/95] Use a safety seat that is recommended for thesize and weight of the child. Always follow thesafety seat manufacturer’s instructions wheninstalling and using the safety seat.

*[SR15710(ALL)08/95] Ford recommends the use of a child safety seathaving a top tether strap. Install the child safetyseat in a seating position which is capable ofproviding a tether anchorage. For moreinformation on top tether straps see AttachingSafety Seats With Tether Straps in this chapter.

[SR15720(ALL)08/95] When installing a child safety seat, be sure touse the correct safety belt buckle for that seatingposition, and make sure the tongue is securelyfastened in the buckle.

*[SR15735(ALL)07/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a right frontpassenger air bag. Air bags deploy with greatforce, faster than the blink of an eye. Frontpassengers, especially children and small adults,must never sit on the front edge of the seat,stand near the glove compartment of theinstrument panel, or lean over near the air bagcover when the vehicle is moving. All occupantsshould sit with their backs against the seatback,move the seat to the most rearward position ifpossible and use the safety belts. Childrenweighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always shoulduse child or infant seats.


When using forward-facing child seatsmove the passenger seat as far back fromthe instrument panel as possible. NEVERSECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATSIN THE FRONT SEAT.


61

*[SR15745(ALL)08/95] The force of the rapidly inflating passenger airbag could push the top of the rear-facing seatagainst the vehicle seatback, armrests or console.Rear-facing infant seats must always be securedin the rear seat.

*[SR15748(ALL)07/95] All child restraint systems are designed to besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts or by thelap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.


If you do not properly secure the safetyseat, the child occupying the seat may beinjured during a collision or sudden stop.An unsecured safety seat could also injureother passengers.


Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’sinstructions included with the safety seatyou put in your vehicle. If you do notinstall and use the safety seat properly,the child may be injured in a sudden stopor collision.


62


Always keep the buckle release buttonpointing upward and away from the childseat, with the tongue between the childseat and the release button as shown inthe following illustration. Failure tofollow these instructions could result inaccidental unbuckling of the safety belt ifthe child safety seat hits the releasebutton. Release of the safety belt couldresult in serious injuries.

[SR15795(ALL)03/95]


Safety belt buckle placement for child seats


63

[SR15800(E )08/95] Installing the Child Safety Seat in theFront Seat with a Locking Clip (Canadian2-door vehicles only)

[SR15810(E )08/95] If your vehicle is not equipped with a duallocking mode retractor for the front passenger,the lap belt will have the following label:

[SR15820(E )08/95]


Figure 1: Locking clip label

[SR15830(E )08/95] A locking clip must be used to properly secure achild seat in a front seat not equipped with adual locking mode retractor.


A locking clip must be used to properlysecure a safety seat in the front seat ofCanadian 2-door vehicles without a duallocking retractor.


64


If you do not use a locking clip, injuriescould result from the child seat tippingover during normal braking or turning.

[SR15860(E )08/95] To install the locking clip

[SR15870(E )08/95] 1. Thread the belt webbing through the childseat according to the child seat’smanufacturer’s instructions.

[SR15880(E )08/95] 2. Buckle the safety belt.

[SR15890(E )08/95]


[SR15900(E )08/95] 3. Pull on the shoulder portion of the belt tomake the lap portion fit snugly. Keeping thelap belt snug, hold the lap and shoulder beltportions of the webbing together next to thesliding tongue and unbuckle the seat belt.See Figure 2.


65

[SR15910(E )08/95]

one third page art:0060562-B

[SR15920(E )08/95] 4. Slide either corner of the locking clip slotclosest to the tongue over both layers ofwebbing. See Figure 3.

[SR15930(E )08/95]


[SR15940(E )08/95] 5. Pinch both opposite edges of webbingtogether and insert them into the locking clipslot. See Figure 4.


66

[SR15950(E )08/95]


[SR15960(E )08/95] 6. Pinch both layers of webbing together andinsert into other slot of locking clip. SeeFigure 5.

[SR16970(E )08/95]



67

[SR16980(E )08/95] 7. Re-buckle belt. Forcibly tilt the child seatfrom side to side and also tug it forward tosee if it is held securely in place. See Figure6. If excessive movement occurs, repeat steps2 through 7 or properly install child seat ina different seating position in the vehicle.


Once you have attached the safety seat,test the seat before you place the child init. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also tryto tug the seat forward. Check to see ifthe belt holds the seat in place. If the lapbelt is too loose, tighten it by moving thelocking clip, or put the safety seat inanother seat and test it again. If the safetyseat is not anchored properly, the risk of achild being injured in a collision orsudden stop greatly increases. Recliningseatbacks should be in the most uprightposition for use with child safety seats.


68

[SR17005(ALL)09/95] Installing Safety Seats in the Front Seat(U.S. vehicles and Canadian 4-door sedan,4-door hatchback and wagon vehicles)

[SR17010(ALL)09/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual lockingmode retractor on the front lap belt (U.S.vehicles) or the lap belt portion of the frontlap/shoulder belt (Canadian vehicles). The lapbelt will have the following label:

[SR17012(ALL)09/95]


*[SR17020(ALL)08/93] The automatic locking mode must be used wheninstalling a child seat in the front passenger seat.

[SR17025(ALL)01/95] If you choose to install a forward-facing childsafety seat in a front seat with a dual lockingmode retractor:

[SR17026(ALL)01/95] 1. Move the front passenger seat as far back aspossible.

[SR17030(ALL)01/95] 2. Position the child seat in the front passengerseat of the vehicle.


69

[SR17035(ALL)03/95] 3. Follow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions. Route the lap or lap/shoulderbelt through the child seat and insert the belttongue into the buckle until you hear andfeel the latch engage.

[SR17040(ALL)01/95] Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor belt routing.

[SR17045(ALL)01/95]


Routing the lap or lap/shoulder belt

[SR17070(ALL)01/95] 4. Grasp the lap portion of the belt below thechild seat label. Pull upward until all of thebelt is extracted and a click is heard. At thistime, the lap belt retractor is in theautomatic locking mode (child seat restraintmode).


70

[SR17075(ALL)09/95]


Setting the automatic locking mode

[SR17080(ALL)03/95] 5. Allow the belt to retract. A clicking soundwill be heard as the belt retracts. Thisindicates the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode. Push down on the child seatwhile you pull down on the belt to removeany slack in the belt.


71

[SR17085(ALL)09/95]


Removing slack from the belt

[SR17090(ALL)01/95] 6. Before placing the child in the child seat,forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, andalso tug it forward to make sure that theseat is securely held in place.


72

[SR17100(ALL)09/95]


Checking that the seat is secure

[SR17105(ALL)01/95] 7. Double check that the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode. Try to pull morebelt out of the retractor, if you cannot, thebelt is in the automatic locking mode.

[SR17110(ALL)01/95] 8. Check to make sure that the child seat isproperly secured prior to each use. If the lapbelt is not locked, repeat steps 4 through 7.

[SR17115(ALL)09/95] NOTE: When the safety belt is unbuckled andallowed to retract completely, theretractor will switch to the vehiclesensitive (emergency) locking mode.See the detailed instructions underFront Passenger Lap Belt Retractor inthis chapter.


73

[SR17118(E )08/95] Installing Child Safety Seats in the FrontPassenger Seating Position (Canadian2-door Hatchback vehicles)

[SR17120(E )06/95] For vehicles equipped with a dual locking moderetractor, use the following procedure.

*[SR17125(E )06/95] If you choose to install a child safety seat orinfant carrier in the front seating positions, movevehicle seat as far back as possible.

*[SR17130(E )06/95] 1. Position the child seat in the center of thepassenger seat.

*[SR17135(E )09/95] 2. Pull down on shoulder belt, then graspshoulder belt and lap belt together. SeeFigure 1.

*[SR17137(E )09/95]


Pulling out belt webbing


74

*[SR17140(E )08/95] 3. While holding the shoulder and lap beltportions together, route the tongue throughthe child seat according to the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Besure that the belt webbing is not twisted.

*[SR17145(E )06/95]


Routing the lap/shoulder belt


75

*[SR17150(E )08/95] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the buckle for thatseating position until you hear and feel thelatch engage. See Figure 3. Make sure tongueis latched securely to buckle by pulling ontongue.

*[SR17155(E )06/95]


Buckling the belt

*[SR17160(E )08/95] 5. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt andpull downward until all of the belt isextracted and a click is heard. At this time,the retractor is in the automatic lockingmode (child seat restraint mode). SeeFigure 4.

*[SR17165(E )06/95] NOTE: The dual-locking mode retractor mustbe in the automatic locking mode toproperly restrain a child.


76

*[SR17170(E )06/95]


Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode

*[SR17175(E )08/95] 6. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder webbing. A clicking sound will beheard as the belt retracts. This indicates theretractor is in the automatic locking mode.Push down on the child seat while you pullup on the belt to remove any slack in thebelt. See Figures 5 and 6.


77

*[SR17180(E )09/95]


Allowing shoulder belt to retract

*[SR17185(E )09/95]


Removing slack from belt


78

*[SR17190(E )08/95] 7. Before placing the child in the child seat,forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, andtug it forward to make sure that the seat issecurely held in place. See Figure 7.

*[SR17195(E )06/95]




79

*[SR17200(E )08/95] 8. Double check that the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode. Try to pull morebelt out of the retractor. If you cannot, thebelt is in the automatic locking mode. SeeFigure 8.

*[SR17205(E )06/95]


Checking the retractor

*[SR17210(E )06/95] 9. Check to make sure that the child seat isproperly secured prior to each use. If theretractor is not locked, repeat steps 4through 7.

*[SR17215(E )06/95] To remove the retractor from automatic lockmode, allow webbing to retract fully to itsstowed position and the retractor willautomatically switch back to the vehicle sensitivelocking mode for normal adult usage.


80

[SR17220(ALL)06/95] Installing Child Safety Seats at the RearOutboard Seating Positions (For lap andshoulder belts with cinch tongues)

[SR17225(ALL)06/95] If you install a child safety seat in a rearoutboard seating position with a combination lapand shoulder belt with cinch tongue, use thefollowing procedure:

*[SR17230(ALL)06/95] 1. Grasp the belt webbing below the tongueand pull as much of the belt out of theretractor as possible. Hold the belt out. SeeFigure 1.

[SR17235(ALL)08/95]


Pulling out belt webbing

[SR17240(ALL)06/95] NOTE: The belt webbing below the tongue isthe lap belt portion of the combinationlap and shoulder belt, and the beltwebbing above the tongue is theshoulder belt portion of thecombination lap and shoulder belt.


81

[SR17245(ALL)06/95] 2. With your other hand, grasp the tip (metalportion) of the tongue (not the cover) andslide the tongue up the webbing as far as itwill go. See Figure 1. Release the tongue, butdo not let go of the lap belt webbing.

[SR17250(ALL)06/95] 3. While holding the lap belt webbing in onehand, use your other hand to pinch the tip(metal portion) of the tongue and beltwebbing together and again pull out asmuch of the belt as possible. Then, let go ofthe lap belt webbing.

[SR17255(ALL)06/95] 4. Route the tongue and webbing through thechild seat according to the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Besure that the belt webbing is not twisted. Ifso, remove the twist. (For instructions onhow to remove a twist, see the Procedure toCorrect a Rotated Tongue on the Safety Beltsection in this chapter.)

[SR17260(ALL)08/95]


Routing the lap/shoulder belt


82

[SR17265(ALL)08/95] 5. Insert the belt tongue into the proper bucklefor the seating position until you hear a snapand feel it latch. Make sure the tongue issecurely fastened to the buckle. Let go of thebelt webbing. See Figure 3.

[SR17270(ALL)08/95]


Buckling the belt


83

[SR17275(ALL)06/95] 6. Push down on the child seat and, at thebuckle, pull up on the shoulder belt totighten the lap belt portion of thecombination lap and shoulder belt. SeeFigure 4.

[SR17280(ALL)08/95]


Tightening lap portion of belt


84

[SR17285(ALL)06/95] 7. From outside the vehicle, grasp and pull onthe shoulder belt portion of the combinationlap and shoulder belt that secures the childsafety seat in the vehicle. See Figure 5.

[SR17290(ALL)08/95]


Tightening shoulder portion of belt

[SR17295(ALL)08/95] 8. Forcibly tilt the child seat from side to sideand tug the seat forward to ensure that theseat is held securely in place. See Figures 6and 7. If the child seat moves excessively,repeat steps 6 through 8 or properly installthe child seat in a different seating position.


85

[SR17300(ALL)08/95]



[SR17305(ALL)08/95]




86

*[SR17310(ALL)06/95] 9. Check from time to time to be sure thatthere is no slack in the lap/shoulder belt.The shoulder belt must be snug to keep thelap belt tight during a collision.

[SR17610(ALL)01/95] Installing a Child Safety Seat at the RearCenter Seating Position (For all vehicles)

[SR17615(ALL)01/95] 1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt,hold the belt tongue at a right angle to thebelt webbing. Slide the tongue up thewebbing.

*[SR17620(ALL)01/95] 2. Place the child safety seat in the centerseating position.

*[SR17622(ALL)01/95] 3. Route the tongue and webbing through thechild seat according to the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions.

[SR17624(ALL)01/95] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper bucklefor the center seating position until you heara snap and feel it latch. Make sure thetongue is securely fastened to the buckle.

*[SR17626(ALL)01/95] 5. Push down on the child seat while pullingon the loose end of the lap belt webbing totighten the belt.

[SR17630(ALL)08/95] 6. Forcibly tilt the child seat from side to sideand tug the seat forward to ensure that theseat is held securely in place. If the childseat moves excessively, repeat steps 5through 6 or properly install the child seatin a different seating position.


87

[SR18600(ALL)01/95] Attaching Child Safety Seats with TetherStraps (For all vehicles)

*[SR18700(ALL)06/95] Some manufacturers make safety seats thatinclude a tether strap that goes over the back ofthe vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoringpoint. Other manufacturers offer the tether strapas an accessory. Contact the manufacturer ofyour child safety seat for information aboutordering a tether strap.

*[SR19100(E )07/95] If you use a tethered safety seat on one of therear seats, you can anchor the strap to theappropriate tether anchor directly behind thatseat position.

*[SR19110(ALL)08/95] Front Seats

*[SR19120(ALL)08/95] To install a tether from a child safety seat in thefront seat:

*[SR19130(ALL)08/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder belt (in the seatdirectly behind the front passenger seat inwhich the child safety seat will be installed).

[SR19140(ALL)08/95] 2. Pull at the stored belt out of the rear seatretractor to switch the retractor to automaticlocking mode.

*[SR19150(ALL)08/95] 3. Let the retractor wind up the slack from thelap/shoulder belt.

*[SR19160(ALL)08/95] 4. Install the child safety seat in the front seat.Refer to the previous section on InstallingSafety Seats. Hook the tether strap hookaround the webbing near the center of theshoulder portion of the locked lap/shoulderbelt.

*[SR19170(ALL)08/95] 5. Tighten the tether strap.


88

[SR19180(ALL)08/95] Rear Seats

[SR19190(ALL)08/95] If you use a tethered safety seat on one of therear seats, you can anchor the strap to theappropriate tether anchor directly behind thatseat position.

*[SR19200(ALL)08/95] Tether anchorage hardware (Canadianvehicles only)

[SR19300(ALL)10/89] All vehicles built for sale in Canada include atether anchor hardware kit for use withCanadian child safety seats. Attachment holes (ateach rear seating position) have been providedin your vehicle to attach the anchor hardware, ifrequired. Additional kits can be obtained at nocharge from any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

*[SR19400(ALL)08/95] Tether anchorage hardware (U.S. vehiclesonly)

[SR19500(ALL)10/91] Vehicles built for sale in the USA do not includea tether anchor hardware kit for use with childsafety seats. However, attachment holes (at eachrear seating position) have been provided inyour vehicle to attach the tether anchorhardware. Tether anchor hardware kits can beobtained at no charge from any Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer.

[SR19550(ALL)08/95] Be sure to follow the child safety seatmanufacturer’s instructions.


Tighten the anchor according tospecifications. Otherwise the safety seatmay not be properly secured and the childmay be injured in a sudden stop orcollision.


89

*[SR19650(ALL)06/95] Tether anchorage hardware

[SR19700(ALL)06/95] The 2-door hatchback, 4-door hatchback, andwagon models have tether anchors at thelocations shown.

[SR19750(E )06/95]


Tether attachment locations in the 2-door hatchback and4-door hatchback models

[SR19800(E )08/95]


Tether attachment locations in the 4-door LX model


90

[SR19900(ALL)06/95]


Tether attachment locations in the 4-door model

[SR20000(ALL)06/95] 1. Find the plastic snap on covers for the tetheranchors in the locations shown.

*[SR20050(ALL)04/95] 2. Use a screwdriver or coin to snap the coversoff the anchor in a rearward and upwarddirection. Remove the covers completely.

[SR20100(ALL)06/95] NOTE: On the 4-door sedan model, holes haveto be cut through the package tray (atthe locations shown) to attach thetether anchors. The package tray trimpanel has visible markings at theselocations showing where to cut theholes (see the appropriate illustration).A sharp knife is recommended forcutting through the panel.

[SR20150(ALL)06/95] 3. Snap the tether strap hook onto the tetheranchor.


91

[SR20160(ALL)08/95] Built-In Child Seat (If Equipped)

[SR20170(ALL)08/95] The optional rear seat may include a built-inchild seat. This child restraint is to be used onlyby children who are at least one year old, weighbetween 20 and 60 pounds (9 and 27 kilograms)and whose shoulders (top) are below theshoulder harness slots. See Figure 1.

[SR20180(ALL)08/95]

quarter page art:0070112-D

Figure 1: Proper child shoulder height

[SR20190(ALL)08/95] If your child is less than one year old or weighsless than 20 pounds (9 kilograms), always use arear facing infant or convertible seat because achild of that size is not sufficiently developed towithstand crash forces in a front facing position.Follow the specific manufacturer’s instructionsfor weight and height restrictions.

[SR20200(ALL)08/95] Children must be properly buckled before ridingin the vehicle. It is the law in every state andprovince. This child seat conforms to allFederal/Canadian motor vehicle safetystandards.


The rear seatback must be fully lockedbefore operating the child restraint system.

[SR20220(ALL)08/95] Ensure that the latch release buttons are in thefull up (locked) positions on both sides of theseat.


92

[SR20230(ALL)08/95] When the latch release buttons are in the full upposition (locked) and the built-in child seat isopen, the rear seatback cannot be unlocked andfolded down. See Figure 2.

[SR20240(ALL)08/95]

half page art:0070113-G

Figure 2: Latch release buttons

[SR20250(ALL)08/95] Built-In Child Seat Belt Retractors

[SR20260(ALL)08/95] The belts on the built-in child seat are equippedwith a dual locking mode retractor. The childseat belts can be used with the retractor in eitherthe emergency locking mode or the automaticlocking mode. In the emergency locking mode,the retractor allows freedom of movement,locking only on hard braking, hard cornering, orcollisions. In the automatic locking mode, theretractor will remain locked and does not allowthe child freedom of movement.


93

[SR20270(ALL)08/95] The retractor will switch from the emergencylocking mode to the automatic locking modewhen the shoulder belts are pulled all the wayout. The retractor will switch back to emergencylocking mode when the belts are unbuckled andthe shoulder belts retract completely.

[SR20280(ALL)08/95] The automatic locking mode must be used tohold small children in position, particularlysleeping children and those who may try tosquirm out of the belts.


Never leave a child unattended in yourvehicle.


Safety belts and seats can become hot in avehicle that has been closed up in sunnyweather; they could burn a small child.Check seat covers and buckles before youplace a child anywhere near them.


Failure to follow all of the instructions onthe use of this child restraint system canresult in your child striking the vehicle’sinterior during a sudden stop or crash.


94

[SR20320(ALL)08/95] How to use the Built-In Child Seat

[SR20330(ALL)08/95] Read the following procedures and all of thelabels on the built-in child seat before using theseat.


Never use the Built-In Child Seat as abooster cushion with the adult safetybelts. A child using the adult belts couldslide forward and out from under thesafety belts.

[SR20350(ALL)08/95] 1. Slide hand under the flap and pull down thetop portion of the child seat. See Figure 3.

[SR20360(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The child seat cannot be opened unlessthe seatback is latched in the uprightposition.

[SR20370(ALL)08/95]


Figure 3: Unfolding built-in child seat


95

[SR20380(ALL)08/95] 2. Release the cushion retention clip. SeeFigure 4.

[SR20390(ALL)08/95]

half page art:0070116-G

Figure 4: Location of cushion retention clip andwarning/instruction labels

[SR20400(ALL)08/95] 3. Lower the child seat cushion. If the childseat cannot be opened, return to the dealerfor repair.

[SR20410(ALL)08/95] 4. Read the information and warnings on thetop half of the child seat flap and shoulderbelt. Refer to Figure 4. Check the child’s size,weight and age to be sure the child is nottoo small or too large for the child seat.


96

[SR20420(ALL)08/95]


Figure 5: Unfolding built-in child seat

[SR20430(ALL)08/95] 5. Fold the top half of the child seat under thechild seat cushion to provide an elevatedseating surface as shown in Figure 5.

[SR20440(ALL)08/95] 6. If the chest clip is connected, squeeze the topand the bottom of the right half of the chestclip and pull to separate both halves.


97

[SR20450(ALL)08/95] 7. Place the child on the child seat and positionthe shoulder belts over each shoulder. Referto Figure 6.

[SR20460(ALL)08/95]


Figure 6: Shoulder safety belt placement on the child

[SR20470(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Read the following steps carefully tobecome familiar with the indicatorwindows located on the crotch safetybelt buckle and the chest clip. Wheneither of the tongues or the chest clipis unbuckled, the color red appears inthe window. When the tongues orchest clip are securely buckled, thecolor green appears. See Figures 7and 9.

[SR20480(ALL)08/95] 8. Insert the left safety belt tongue into thesingle opening of the crotch safety beltbuckle as shown in Figure 6, then insert theright tongue as shown in Figure 7. Theindicator window on each tongue mustappear green when buckled.


If both tongues do not latch in the buckle,do not use the child seat. See your dealerfor repairs.


98

[SR20500(ALL)08/95]


Figure 7: Fastening the crotch safety belt buckle

[SR20510(ALL)08/95] 9. Fasten both halves of the chest clip belowthe child’s shoulders and adjust it tocomfortably hold the child’s shoulders andadjust it to comfortably hold the shoulderbelts in place on the child’s chest. The colorgreen must show in the indicator whenfastened. The purpose of this clip is toposition the shoulder belts correctly on thechild’s shoulders. The clip can be easilypulled apart and is designed to pull apartduring a collision. The clip helps keep thebelts on the shoulders of a sleeping orsquirming child. Refer to Figures 8 and 9.


99

[SR20520(ALL)08/95]

one third page art:0070121-C

Figure 8: Securing the chest clip

[SR20530(ALL)08/95]


Figure 9: Chest clip indicator window


100

[SR20540(ALL)08/95] 10. Pull on the safety belt tongues to be surethat they are both latched. See Figure 10.

[SR20550(ALL)08/95]


Figure 10: Checking for securely latched buckle and lockedretractor

[SR20560(ALL)08/95] 11. If the child sleeps or tries to get out of thechild seat, pull shoulder out fully to put theretractor into automatic lock mode. Allowbelts to tighten snugly against the child’sshoulders. See Figure 10.

[SR20570(ALL)08/95] Automatic lock mode keeps a sleeping child inposition and prevents the child from getting outof the seat while the vehicle is in motion. Olderchildren who do not fall asleep in the child seatmay be secured with the retractor in theemergency locking mode. The belts will lockautomatically during a collison or hard braking.


101

[SR20580(ALL)08/95] To remove the child from the built-in childseat:

[SR20590(ALL)08/95] 1. Squeeze the tabs on the top and bottom ofthe chest clip and pull the halves apart toopen the chest clip. Refer back to Figure 8.

[SR20600(ALL)08/95] 2. Press the release button on the crotch safetybelt buckle.

[SR20610(ALL)08/95] 3. Slide the shoulder belts off the child’sshoulders and remove the child. Refer backto Figure 6.

[SR20620(ALL)08/95] To stow the built-in child seat:

[SR20625(ALL)08/95] When the built-in child seat is not in use, it canbe stowed so that an adult may use the center ofthe rear seat or the rear seatback can be foldeddown.

[SR20630(ALL)08/95] 1. Return the child seat cushion to the uprightposition.

[SR20640(ALL)08/95] 2. Make sure shoulder belts are in the center ofthe back of the child seat. Attach the cushionretention clip. Fold the child seat up into theseatback while tucking the top edge of thechild seat under the flap. See Figure 11.

[SR20650(ALL)08/95] 3. Press firmly in the center of the child seat tokeep in the stowed position. You will not beable to unlock the rear seatback if thebuilt-in child seat is not stowed properly.


102

[SR20660(ALL)08/95]

one third page art:0070156-E

Figure 11: Stowing the built-in child seat

[SR20670(ALL)08/95] Inspection after a collision:


All built-in child restraints, includingseats, buckles, retractors, seat latches,interlocks, and attaching hardware shouldbe inspected by a qualified Dealertechnician after any collision. If the childseat was in use during a collision, Fordrecommends replacing it. However, if thecollision was minor and a qualifiedtechnician finds that the child restraintsdo not show damage and continue tooperate properly, they do not need to bereplaced. Built-in child seats not in useduring a collision should also beinspected and replaced if either damage orimproper operation is noted.

[SR20690(ALL)08/95] Built-in child seat maintenance

[SR20700(ALL)08/95] Regularly inspect the lap and shoulder beltssystem of your child seat. See your Ford dealerif the shoulder belt webbing is frayed, or if thebuckle and tongue are damaged and/or do notfunction properly.


103

[SR20710(ALL)08/95] Cleaning the built-in child seat

[SR20720(ALL)08/95] Your built-in child seat may be cleaned withmild soap and water. Do not use householdcleaners as they may weaken the webbing ordamage the plastic parts. For your convenience,the liner is removable and can bemachine-washed and air-dried. See Figure 12.

[SR20730(ALL)09/95]

one third page art:0070256-D

Figure 12: Removing the washable liner


105

Starting Your Escort

*[ST03300(ALL)03/95] Ignition%*[ST03400(ALL)01/95] Understanding the Positions of the Ignition

[ST03500(ALL)09/95] Your vehicle may have one of the following lockcylinders depending on when it was built:

[ST03600(ALL)09/95]


The ignition lock cylinders

[ST03605(ALL)02/94] LOCK locks the steering wheel when the key isremoved. It also locks the console-mountedgearshift on vehicles with automatic transaxles.To turn the key to this position on an automatictransaxle vehicle, the shift control lever must bein P (Park).

*[ST03610(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

LOCK position does not lock the gearshifton floor-mounted manual transaxlegearshifts. If the parking brake is not setand the gearshift is moved out of gear,your vehicle may move unexpectedly andinjure someone.

File:04ctste.exUpdate:Tue Sep 19 14:42:54 1995

106

[ST03615(ALL)08/95] The automatic transaxle console-mountedgearshift will lock only when you turn the keyto LOCK. When the gearshift is in any gearposition but P (Park), the ignition key cannot beturned to LOCK or be removed from thesteering column.

[ST03620(ALL)02/95] If you have a manual transaxle, you must pushthe key in while turning to the LOCK positionin order to remove the key.

*[ST03625(ALL)01/95] LOCK is the only position that allows you toremove the key. The LOCK feature helps toprotect your vehicle from theft.

[ST03635(ALL)09/95] OFF (if equipped) allows you to shut off theengine and all accessories without locking thesteering wheel.

*[ST03650(ALL)07/95] ACC (accessory) allows some of your vehicle’selectrical accessories such as the radio and thewindshield wipers to operate while the engine isnot running.

[ST03850(ALL)02/95] ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warninglights (except the brake system warning light) tomake sure they work before you start theengine. (The brake system warning light willremain lit if the parking brake is set or if thereis a problem with the brake system.) The keyreturns to the ON position once the engine isstarted and remains in this position while theengine runs.

[ST03900(ALL)02/95] START cranks the engine. Release the key oncethe engine starts so that you do not damage thestarter. The key should return to ON when yourelease it. The START position also allows youto test the brake system warning light.


107

%*[ST04500(ALL)02/95] Removing the Key From the Ignition

*[ST04600(ALL)05/94] Procedures for removing your key from theignition vary, depending on whether yourvehicle has an automatic or manual transaxle.

*[ST04700(ALL)04/94] If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle:

*[ST04800(ALL)06/92] 1. Put the gearshift lever in P (Park).

*[ST04900(ALL)01/95] 2. Set the parking brake fully.

*[ST04950(ALL)03/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

*[ST05100(ALL)03/95] 4. Remove the key.

*[ST05200(ALL)04/94] If your vehicle has a manual transaxle:

*[ST05300(ALL)06/92] 1. Put the gearshift lever in 1 (First).

*[ST05400(ALL)01/95] 2. Set the parking brake fully.

[ST05450(ALL)02/95] 3. Turn the ignition key counterclockwise toACC. Push the key in while turning toLOCK.

*[ST05900(ALL)03/95] 4. Remove the key.

%*[ST06000(ALL)05/95] If the key is stuck in the LOCK position, movethe steering wheel left or right until the keyturns freely.


Always set the parking brake fully andmake sure that the gearshift is securelylatched in P (Park) (automatic transaxle) orin 1 (First) (manual transaxle).


108


Do not leave children, unreliable adults,or pets alone in your vehicle. They couldaccidentally injure themselves or othersthrough inadvertent operation of thevehicle. Further, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere and possibly fatal injuries topeople as well as animals.

%*[ST07700(ALL)03/95] Fuel-Injected Engines

*[ST07800(ALL)03/95] When starting a fuel-injected engine, the mostimportant thing to remember is to avoidpressing down on the accelerator before orduring starting. Only use the accelerator whenyou have problems getting your vehicle started.See Starting Your Engine in this chapter fordetails about when to use the accelerator whileyou start your vehicle.

*[ST08200(ALL)03/95] Starting Your Vehicle%*[ST08300(ALL)05/94] Preparing to Start Your Vehicle


Do not start your vehicle in a closedgarage or other enclosed area. Never sit ina stopped vehicle for more than a shortperiod of time with the engine running.Exhaust fumes are toxic. See GuardingAgainst Exhaust Fumes in this chapter formore instructions.


109

*[ST08400(ALL)01/95] Before you start your vehicle, do the following:

*[ST08500(ALL)08/95] 1. Make sure all occupants in the vehiclebuckle their safety belts. See Safety Restraintsin the Index for more details.

*[ST08600(ALL)03/95] 2. Make sure the headlamps and otheraccessories are turned off when starting.

*[ST08700(ALL)02/92] 3. If you have an automatic transaxle, makesure that the gearshift is in P (Park) and theparking brake is set before you turn the key.

[ST08750(ALL)03/95] If you have an automatic transaxle, yourvehicle has a special shift-lock safety feature.It prevents you from moving the gearshiftlever out of the P (Park) position unless theignition is in the ON position and your footis on the brake. To move the gearshift lever,you must also depress the thumb button.

*[ST08800(ALL)07/93] If you have a manual transaxle, make surethat the parking brake is fully set, push theclutch pedal to the floor, and put thegearshift into Neutral before you turn thekey. (Remember, the starter will operateonly if the clutch pedal is pushed all theway to the floor.)

[ST09000(ALL)06/95] 4. Before you start your vehicle, you shouldcheck the warning lights on the instrumentpanel to make sure that they work. Refer tothe Warning Lights and Gauges chapter.

%*[ST09400(ALL)02/95] Starting Your Engine

*[ST09500(ALL)06/95] To start your engine:

*[ST09600(ALL)05/95] 1. Follow the steps under Preparing to StartYour Vehicle at the beginning of this section.

*[ST09650(ALL)03/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.

*[ST09720(ALL)06/95] 3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting your engine. DO NOT use theaccelerator while the vehicle is parked.


110

*[ST09740(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the key to the START position(cranking) until the engine starts. Allow thekey to return to the ON position after theengine has started.

*[ST09750(ALL)02/95] If you have difficulty in turning the key,rotate the steering wheel slightly because itmay be binding.

%*[ST09752(ALL)04/95] For a cold engine:

*[ST09754(ALL)06/95] ❑At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: Ifthe engine does not start in fifteen (15)seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF,wait approximately ten (10) seconds so youdo not flood the engine, then try again.

*[ST09756(ALL)04/95] ❑At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If theengine does not start in five (5) seconds onthe first try, turn the key to OFF, waitapproximately ten (10) seconds so you do notflood the engine, then try again.

%*[ST09768(ALL)05/95] For a warm engine:

*[ST09770(ALL)04/95] ❑Do not hold the key in the START positionfor more than five (5) seconds at a time. Ifthe engine does not start within five (5)seconds on the first try, turn the key to theOFF position. Wait a few seconds after thestarter stops, then try again.

*[ST09780(ALL)08/95] Whenever you start your vehicle, release the keyas soon as the engine starts. Excessive crankingcould damage the starter.

*[ST09790(ALL)09/95] After starting, allow the engine to idle for a fewseconds before driving away.


111

*[ST09800(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic transaxle, your vehicle hasan interlock that prevents you fromshifting out of P (Park) unless yourfoot is on the brake pedal.

%*[ST09860(ALL)04/95] If the engine does not start after two attempts:

*[ST09880(ALL)03/95] 1. Turn the key to the OFF position and waitabout two minutes.

*[ST09890(ALL)04/95] 2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floorand hold it.

*[ST09900(ALL)04/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to the START position.

*[ST09910(ALL)04/95] 4. Release the ignition key when the enginestarts.

*[ST09920(ALL)04/95] 5. Release the accelerator gradually as theengine speeds up. Then drive away in thenormal manner.

*[ST09930(ALL)04/95] If the engine still does not start, the fuel pumpshut-off switch may have been triggered. Fordirections on how to reset the switch see FuelPump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter.

[ST10200(ALL)06/93] A computer system controls the engine’s idleRPM. When you start your vehicle, the engine’sidling RPM normally runs higher than whenwarm. The engine idle control system shouldonly be serviced by a qualified technician.

*[ST10290(ALL)07/95] If the engine idle speed does not slow downautomatically, do not allow your vehicle to idlefor more than 10 minutes. Have the vehiclechecked.


112


Extended idling at high engine speeds canproduce very high temperatures in theengine and exhaust system, creating therisk of fire or other damage.


Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle indry grass or other dry ground cover. Theemission system heats up the enginecompartment and exhaust system, whichcan start a fire.

%*[ST10550(ALL)06/95] Using the Engine Block Heater(If equipped)

*[ST10700(ALL)03/95] Engine block heaters are strongly recommendedif you live in a region where temperatures reachS20˚F (S29˚C) or below consistently during thewinter months. An engine block heater warmsthe engine coolant, which improves starting,warms up the engine faster, and allows theheater-defrost system to respond quickly.

*[ST10900(ALL)02/95] To turn the heater on, simply plug it into agrounded 110-volt outlet. Ford recommends thatyou use a 110-volt circuit that is protected by aground fault circuit interrupter.


To prevent electrical shock, do not useyour heater with ungrounded electricalsystems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters.


113

*[ST11105(ALL)03/95] For best results, plug the heater in at least threehours before you start your vehicle. Using theheater for longer than three hours will notdamage the engine, so you can plug it in atnight to start your vehicle the followingmorning.

%*[ST11110(ALL)03/95] If the Engine Cranks but DoesNot Start or Does Not Start Aftera Collision

*[ST11120(ALL)07/95] The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch

*[ST11130(ALL)07/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or doesnot start after a collision, the fuel pump shut-offswitch may have been triggered. The shut-offswitch is a device intended to stop the fuelpump when your vehicle has been involved in asubstantial jolt.

[ST11140(ALL)03/95] Once the shut-off switch is triggered, you mustreset the switch by hand before you can startyour vehicle. The fuel pump shut-off switch islocated behind the right rear trim panel in thetrunk. You can reach the switch to reset itthrough the access hole.


114

[ST11150(E )08/95]


Location of the fuel pump shut-off switch (location onwagon similar)


If you see or smell fuel, do not reset theswitch or try to start your vehicle. Haveall the passengers get out of the vehicleand call the local fire department or atowing service.

*[ST11180(ALL)03/95] If your engine cranks but does not start after acollision or substantial jolt:

[ST11190(ALL)03/95] 1. Turn the key in the ignition to LOCK.

*[ST11200(ALL)03/95] 2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel.

*[ST11210(ALL)03/95] 3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the redreset button down. If the button is alreadyset, you may have a different mechanicalproblem.


115

[ST11220(ALL)03/95] 4. Turn the ignition key ON for a few seconds,then turn it to LOCK.

*[ST11230(ALL)03/95] 5. Check under the vehicle again for leakingfuel. If you see or smell fuel, do not startyour vehicle again. If you do not see orsmell fuel, you can try to start your vehicleagain.

%*[ST12300(ALL)05/95] Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes

*[ST12400(ALL)02/95] Carbon monoxide, although colorless andodorless, is present in exhaust fumes. Takeprecautions to avoid its dangerous effects.


Do not start your vehicle in a closedgarage or other enclosed area. Never sit ina stopped vehicle for more than a shortperiod of time with the engine running.Exhaust fumes are toxic. See GuardingAgainst Exhaust Fumes in this chapter formore instructions.


If you smell exhaust fumes inside yourvehicle, have your dealer inspect yourvehicle immediately. Do not drive if yousmell exhaust fumes.


116

*[ST12700(ALL)01/95] Have the exhaust and body ventilation systemschecked whenever:

*[ST12800(ALL)02/95] ❑your vehicle is raised for service

*[ST12900(ALL)02/95] ❑ the sound of the exhaust system changes

*[ST13000(ALL)01/95] ❑your vehicle has been damaged in a collision

*[ST13200(ALL)01/95] Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inletvents clear of snow, leaves, and other debris.

[ST13250(ALL)06/94]


*[ST13300(ALL)08/95] If the engine is idling while you are stopped inan open area for long periods of time, open thewindows at least one inch (2.5 cm). Also, adjustthe heating or air conditioning system to bringin outside air.


117

Warning Lights andGauges

*[LG00500(E )02/95] Your vehicle has one of the following clusters:

*[LG00600(E )05/91] ❑Standard Cluster

*[LG00700(E )12/89] ❑Sport Cluster

*[LG01100(E )05/94] If you are not sure which cluster your vehiclehas, check the diagrams on the following pages.

*[LG01700(E )12/89] Standard Cluster

*[LG01800(E )12/89] The following warning lights and gauges are onthe standard cluster. All of the warning lightsand gauges alert you to possible problems withyour vehicle. The following sections detail whateach of these indicators means.

File:05ctlge.exUpdate:Tue Sep 19 14:44:43 1995

118

[LG01850(E)09/95]

fullpageart:0070059-G

Th

estan

dard

cluster

File:05ctlge.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:44:43 1995

119

*[LG01875(ALL)01/95] Indicator Lights and Chimes[LG02500(ALL)04/94] Safety Belt Warning Light/Chime (U.S.

vehicles equipped with motorized passiverestraint)

*[LG02510(ALL)08/95] The safety belt warning light/chime reminds youto fasten your safety belt. One of the followingwill take place:

[LG02520(ALL)03/95] ❑ If the lap belt is not buckled when the key isturned to the ON position, the light willcome on for one to two minutes and thechime will sound for four to eight seconds.

[LG02530(ALL)03/95] ❑ If the lap belt is buckled while the light is onand the chime is sounding, both the light andchime will turn off.

[LG02540(ALL)03/95] ❑ If the lap belt is buckled before the key isturned to the ON position, neither the lightnor chime will activate.

[LG02545(ALL)05/94] If the warning light remains illuminated formore than one minute, check to be sure thatboth shoulder belts are latched to the emergencyrelease buckle. If the warning light remainsilluminated with both front seat shoulder beltslatched to the emergency release buckles, refer tothe section titled What to Do If Your Shoulder BeltDoes Not Engage Properly before driving thevehicle.


120

[LG02549(E )06/94] Safety Belt Warning Light/Chime(Canadian vehicles equipped withcombination lap and shoulder belts)

[LG02550(E )09/95] This warning light and chime remind you in twoways to fasten your safety belt. If you do notfasten the safety belt before you turn the ignitionkey to ON, the chime sounds for four (4) toeight (8) seconds. Also, each time you turn theignition key to ON, the warning light comes onfor one to two minutes to remind you to fastenyour combination lap and shoulder belt.

[LG02700(ALL)03/91]

one inch art:0070005-A

The safety belt light

[LG02750(ALL)08/95] Brake Warning Light

*[LG02900(ALL)03/95] The warning light for the brakes can show twothings — that the parking brake is not fullyreleased, or that the brake fluid level is low inthe master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level islow, the brake system should be checked byyour dealer or a qualified service technician.

[LG03500(ALL)12/89] This light comes on when you turn the ignitionkey to START, but it normally goes off shortlyafter the engine starts and you release theparking brake. If the light stays on or comes onafter you have released the parking brake fully,have the hydraulic brake system serviced.


121

[LG03550(ALL)08/95]


The brake system and parking brake light

*[LG03600(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The BRAKE light indicates that the brakesmay not be working properly. Have thebrakes checked immediately.

%*[LG03800(ALL)01/95] Charging System Light

*[LG03900(ALL)03/95] This light indicates that your battery is not beingcharged and that you need to have the electricalsystem checked.

*[LG04300(ALL)07/95] This light comes on every time you turn theignition to the ON or START position (engineoff). The light should go off when the enginestarts and the alternator begins to charge.

*[LG04400(ALL)01/95] If the light stays on or comes on when theengine is running, have the electrical systemchecked as soon as possible.

[LG04500(ALL)12/89]


The charging system light


122

[LG05700(ALL)08/95] Upshift Indicator Light (If equipped)

[LG05725(ALL)03/91] This light comes on to indicate when you shouldshift your manual transaxle to the next highergear. This light will help you get better fueleconomy by lighting when you should shift.(If you have a 1.8L engine you will not have anupshift indicator light.)

[LG05750(ALL)08/95]


The upshift indicator light

%*[LG06200(ALL)01/95] High Beam Light

*[LG06300(ALL)03/95] This light comes on when the headlamps areturned to high beam or when you flash thelights.

[LG06400(ALL)03/91]


The high beam light


123

[LG06600(ALL)07/93] Liftgate Ajar Light (Wagons only)

[LG06700(ALL)01/92] This light comes on when you turn the ignitionkey to ON if the liftgate is not fully closed.

[LG06750(ALL)12/89]


The liftgate ajar light

[LG07000(ALL)08/95] Chime for Headlamps On

*[LG07100(ALL)07/95] This chime sounds if the driver or any passengerdoor is open when the parking lamps orheadlamps are on. The chime sounds until youclose the door, turn off the lamps or turn theignition to the ON position.

%*[LG07200(ALL)01/95] Air Bag Readiness Light

*[LG07210(ALL)05/95] A problem with the system is indicated by oneor more of the following: the readiness light willeither flash or stay lit, or it will not light, or agroup of five beeps will be heard.

*[LG07220(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If any of these things happen, evenintermittently, have the air bag systemserviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer immediately.

[LG07300(ALL)04/94] This light illuminates for approximately sixseconds when the ignition is turned to the ONposition. If the light fails to illuminate, continuesto flash, or remains on, have the system servicedas soon as possible.


124

[LG07400(ALL)03/93]


Air bag readiness light

%*[LG07900(ALL)03/95] Check Engine Warning Light

[LG08000(ALL)08/95] The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II)system consists of the hardware and softwarenecessary to monitor the operation of thepowertrain. The OBD II system is designed tocheck the function of the vehicle’s powertraincontrol system during normal operation. If anemission problem is detected, the Check EngineWarning Light is turned on.

[LG08100(ALL)03/91]


The check engine light

[LG08200(ALL)08/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle maycause incorrect operation of the OBD II system.Additions such as burglar alarms, cellularphones, and CB radios must be carefullyinstalled. Do not install these devices by tappinginto or running wires close to powertrain controlsystem wires or components.

[LG08300(ALL)08/95] The light comes on briefly when you turn theignition key to ON, but it should turn off whenthe engine starts. If the light does not come onwhen you are driving, have your vehicle


125

serviced as soon as possible. This indicates apossible problem with one of the vehicle’semission control systems. You do not need tohave your vehicle towed in.

[LG08400(ALL)08/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) secondintervals while you are driving the vehicle, itmeans that the engine is misfiring. If thiscondition persists, damage could occur to theengine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicleserviced at the first opportunity. You do notneed to have your vehicle towed in.

[LG08500(ALL)08/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasionswhile you are driving, it means that amalfunction occurred and the condition correcteditself.

[LG08600(ALL)08/95] An example of a condition which corrects itselfoccurs when an engine running out of fuelbegins to misfire. In this case, the Check EngineWarning Light may turn on and will then set aDiagnostic Trouble Code indicating that theengine was misfiring while the last of the fuelwas being consumed. After refueling, the CheckEngine Warning light will turn off after thevehicle has completed three consecutive warmup cycles without a misfire condition occurring.A warm up cycle consists of engine start from acold condition (engine at ambient temperature)and running until the engine reaches normaloperating temperature.

[LG08700(ALL)08/95] On the fourth engine start up, the Check EngineWarning Light will turn off as soon as theengine begins to crank. It is not necessary tohave the engine serviced.


126

[LG08800(ALL)08/95] Under certain conditions, the Check EngineWarning Light may come on if the fuel cap isnot properly installed. If the Check EngineWarning Light comes on and you suspect thatthe fuel cap is not properly installed, pull off theroad as soon as it is safely possible and turn offthe engine. Remove and replace the fuel cap,making sure it is properly seated.

[LG08900(ALL)08/95] After completing three (3) consecutive warm upcycles and on the fourth engine start up, theCheck Engine Warning light should turn off. Ifthe light does not go off after the fourth enginerestart, have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer or a qualified technician.

[LG10324(ALL)08/95] Check Coolant Light

[LG10326(ALL)01/92] This light indicates that the level of the enginecoolant is low and that you should add morecoolant. This light comes on when you turn theignition key to START and remains on for a fewseconds after the engine starts, then normallygoes out. See Engine coolant in the Index.

[LG10330(ALL)10/89]


The check coolant light

[LG10338(ALL)10/91] If the CHECK COOLANT warning light stayson, turn the ignition key to OFF and fill therecovery bottle to the FULL HOT mark. If theCHECK COOLANT warning light comes on andstays on after the recovery bottle has been filled,have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.


127

%*[LG10355(ALL)05/95] Turn Signal Indicator Lights

*[LG10360(ALL)05/95] When you push the turn signal lever up beforemaking a right turn, the right side arrow on theinstrument panel flashes.

*[LG10365(ALL)05/95] When you push the turn signal lever downbefore making a left turn, the left side arrow onthe instrument panel flashes.

[LG10370(ALL)08/93] Usually, the turn signals turn off automaticallyafter you turn your vehicle. If the turn signalcontinues to flash after you have made the turn,pull the lever back to OFF.

%*[LG10390(ALL)02/95] Anti-lock Brake System Warning Light(If equipped)

[LG10400(ALL)03/95] Your vehicle may have an Anti-lock BrakeSystem (ABS) feature. If it does, check theAnti-lock Brake System (ABS) light each timeyou start the engine. If it stays on longer thansix seconds, shut off the engine and restart. If itstays on, that means the Anti-lock Brake featureisn’t working and should be servicedimmediately to restore the benefits of theanti-lock brake feature. Normal braking is notaffected unless the brake warning light is also lit.

[LG10410(ALL)07/93] The Anti-lock Brake System has self-checkcapabilities. As described above, the systemturns on the anti-lock light each time you startyour engine. After the engine is started and theanti-lock light turns off, the system performsanother test the first time the vehicle reaches7 mph (11 km/h). The system turns on the ABSpump motor for approximately 1/2 second. Atthis time, a mechanical noise may be heard. Thisis a normal part of the self-check feature. If amalfunction is found during this check theanti-lock light will come on.


128

[LG10450(ALL)02/94]


The anti-lock brake system light

%*[LG20000(ALL)02/95] Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light

[LG20025(ALL)06/95] This light indicates low oil pressure, not low oillevel. However, if your engine’s oil level is low,it could affect the oil pressure. This light comeson every time your ignition key is turned to ONor START. The light should turn off after a fewseconds. If the light stays on when the engine isrunning, you have lost oil pressure andcontinued operation will cause severe enginedamage.

[LG20050(ALL)03/93]


The engine oil pressure light

*[LG20100(ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.

*[LG20125(ALL)11/94] 2. Shut off the engine immediately. If you donot stop the engine as soon as safelypossible, severe engine damage could result.

*[LG20150(ALL)11/94] 3. Check the engine’s oil level, following theinstructions on checking and adding engineoil in this Owner Guide. (See Engine oil inthe Index.) If you do not follow theseinstructions, you or others could be injured.To ensure an accurate reading, your vehicleshould be on level ground.


129

[LG20175(ALL)02/94] 4. If the oil level is low, add as much oil asnecessary before you drive your vehicleagain. Do not overfill. Do not operate theengine when the oil pressure light is on,even if the oil level is correct. For moreinformation about adding oil, see Addingengine oil in the Index.

%*[LG20176(ALL)01/95] Fuel Gauge

*[LG20177(ALL)06/93] The fuel gauge displays approximately howmuch fuel is in the fuel tank only when theignition switch is ON.

[LG20178(ALL)06/93] For proper fuel gauge indication after addingfuel, the ignition switch should be in the OFFposition while the vehicle is being refueled.

*[LG20179(ALL)06/93] The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly whenthe vehicle is in motion.

[LG20180(ALL)06/93] With the ignition switch OFF, the fuel gaugeindicator may drift from the ignition switch ONposition.

%*[LG20181(ALL)01/95] Speedometer

*[LG20182(ALL)01/95] The speedometer tells you how many miles(kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving.

%*[LG20183(ALL)01/95] Odometer

*[LG20184(ALL)01/95] The odometer tells you the total number of miles(kilometers) your vehicle has been driven.

%*[LG20185(ALL)11/94] Trip Odometer

*[LG20186(ALL)11/94] The trip odometer tells you how many miles(kilometers) your vehicle has been driven sincethe last reset. Press the reset button to return thetrip odometer to zero.


130

%*[LG20187(ALL)01/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

*[LG20188(ALL)03/95] This gauge indicates the temperature of theengine coolant, not the coolant level. If thecoolant is not at its proper level or mixture, thegauge indication will not be accurate.

[LG20189(ALL)06/94] The pointer moves from C (Cold) into thenormal band as your vehicle warms up. Undermost driving conditions, the pointer should stayin the normal band. If you are driving in heavytraffic or uphill in hot weather, the pointer mayreach to the top of the normal band.

[LG20190(ALL)06/94]


[LG20191(ALL)10/89] Under any circumstances, if the pointer movespast the upper limit of the normal band, theengine is overheating and may result in enginedamage.


131

*[LG20192(ALL)01/95] If your engine coolant overheats:

*[LG20193(ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as it is safelypossible.

*[LG20194(ALL)01/95] 2. Turn off the engine.

*[LG20195(ALL)05/95] 3. Let the engine cool.

*[LG20196(ALL)03/95] 4. Check the coolant level following theinstructions on checking and adding coolantto your engine. (See Engine coolant in theIndex.) If you do not follow theseinstructions, you or others could be injured.

*[LG20197(ALL)05/92] 5. Add as much coolant as your engine needs.If the engine continues to overheat, have thecoolant system serviced.

[LG20200(E )12/89] The Sport Cluster

*[LG20300(E )04/94] The sport cluster has basically the same standardwarning lights and gauges as the standardcluster, with the following additional features:


132

[LG20350(E)09/95]

fullpageart:0070058-G

Th

esp

ortclu

ster

File:05ctlge.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:44:43 1995

133

%*[LG22100(ALL)02/95] Tachometer

[LG22150(ALL)10/89] The tachometer tells you the approximate enginerevolutions per minute (how fast the engine isrunning). The tachometer is on the right side ofthe instrument cluster.

*[LG22300(ALL)04/95] Driving with the pointer in the red zone maycause engine damage.


135

Instrument Panel Controls

%*[IP00350(ALL)01/95] The instrument panel (dashboard) on yourvehicle is divided into several different sections.The illustrations on the following pages showthe major parts of the instrument panel that aredescribed in this chapter. Some items shownmay not be on all vehicles.

[IP00400(ALL)03/95] The main controls for the climate control system,lamps, clock, and radio are on the instrumentpanel.

File:06ctipe.exUpdate:Tue Sep 19 14:46:28 1995

136

[IP00420(ALL)08/95]

fullpageart:0070016-H

Instru

men

tp

anel

—typ

icaleq

uip

men

tsh

own

File:06ctipe.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:46:28 1995

137

*[IP00450(ALL)03/95] If you have radio transmitting equipment inyour vehicle, be aware that it can interfere withyour vehicle’s electrical system and may causethe instrumentation and/or convenienceproducts to have temporary, abnormal operation.

%*[IP00475(ALL)06/95] NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases thegloss (shine) of the upper part of theinstrument panel should be avoided.The dull finish in this area is to helpprotect the driver from undesirablewindshield reflection.

%*[IP00500(ALL)06/95] The Climate Control Systems

*[IP00510(ALL)06/95] Your vehicle has one of the following climatecontrol systems:

[IP00520(ALL)08/95] ❑Heating Only System

[IP00530(ALL)08/95] ❑Heating and Air Conditioning System

*[IP00540(ALL)06/95] If you are not sure which system your vehiclehas, see the diagrams on the following pages.

[IP00550(ALL)08/95] The Controls

[IP00560(ALL)08/95] The fan speed knob controls the volume of aircirculated in the vehicle. There are four fansettings numbered 1 (low) through 4 (high) andon OFF position.

[IP00570(ALL)08/95] Pushing the A/C button (in the center of the fanspeed knob) turns on the air conditioningsystem, if equipped. The fan must be on for theair conditioning compressor to operate. Theindicator light, to the left of the fan speed knob,will glow when the A/C system is on.

[IP00580(ALL)08/95] The temperature control lever may be adjustedfrom cool air in the blue range to warm air inthe red range.


138

[IP00590(ALL)08/95] The A/C system provides maximum cooling,dehumidifying and better fueling efficiency whenthe function selector lever is set to the MAXA/C position.

[IP00600(ALL)08/95] The function selector lever controls how the airis circulated.

[IP00610(ALL)08/95] ❑RECIRC position (heating system only) orMAX A/C (heating and air conditioningsystem only) circulates the air from inside thevehicle through the instrument panel vents.This position prevents outside air fromentering the vehicle.

[IP00620(ALL)08/95] ❑PANEL position directs air through theinstrument panel registers.

[IP00630(ALL)08/95] ❑PNL/FLR position directs air through boththe instrument panel registers.

[IP00640(ALL)08/95] ❑FLOOR position directs air mainly throughthe floor ducts.

[IP00650(ALL)08/95] ❑FLR/DEF position directs air through boththe floor ducts and the windshield defrosteroutlets.

[IP00660(ALL)08/95] ❑V (Defrost) position directs air to thewindshield through the defroster outlets.


139

[IP00670(ALL)08/95] Comfort Tips

[IP00680(ALL)08/95] ❑For maximum cooling, push the A/C buttonto turn on the system (if equipped) and turnthe fan knob to 4 (indicator light will glow).Set the function selector lever to therecirculated position (MAX A/C), and thetemperature control lever all the way to theleft in the blue (cool) range.

[IP00690(ALL)08/95] ❑ If the inside of your vehicle is very warm,drive for a few minutes with the windowsdown. This forces most of the hot, stale airout of the vehicle and helps the airconditioning (if equipped) to cool the vehiclefaster.

[IP00700(ALL)08/95] ❑For the best ventilation, move the functionselector lever to PANEL and select thedesired temperature and fan speed.

[IP00710(ALL)08/95] For maximum heating, set the function selectorlever to FLOOR, PANEL, PNL/FLR orFLR/DEF, the temperature control lever all theway to the right in the red (warm) range andthe fan speed knob to 4.


140

[IP00720(ALL)08/95] Defrosting/Defogging Tips

[IP00730(ALL)08/95]

full page art:0070202-D

Setting the climate controls for cold weather defrosting


141

[IP00740(ALL)09/95]

three fourths page art:0070203-D

Setting the climate controls for warm weather defogging

[IP00750(ALL)08/95] ❑Under normal conditions, when the vehicle isparked, the climate control system should beleft with the function selector lever in anyposition other than RECIRC (heating) or MAXA/C (heating and air conditioning system).This allows the vehicle to “breathe” throughthe air vents.


142

[IP00760(ALL)08/95] Heating Only System (Without airconditioning)

[IP00770(ALL)08/95] You can heat the inside of your vehicle, defrostthe windshield, or use the outside air vents byusing the climate controls on the center of theinstrument panel.

[IP00780(ALL)08/95]


The levers that control the standard heating system

[IP00790(ALL)08/95] Turning on the heat

[IP00800(ALL)08/95] To heat the inside of your vehicle

[IP00810(ALL)08/95] 1. Move the function selector lever to PANEL,PNL/FLR, FLOOR, FLR/DEF or V(Defrost).

[IP00820(ALL)08/95] When PANEL is selected, air is directed outof the panel registers.

[IP00830(ALL)08/95] When PNL/FLR is selected, air is directedout of the panel registers and the floorducts.

[IP00840(ALL)08/95] When FLOOR is selected, most of the air isdirected through the floor ducts, and a littleair is also directed at the windshield andside windows to help prevent fogging.

[IP00850(ALL)08/95] When FLR/DEF is selected, air is directedthrough the floor ducts and the defroster outlets.

[IP00860(ALL)08/95] When V (Defrost) is selected, air is directedout of the defroster outlets.


143

[IP00870(ALL)08/95] 2. Move the temperature control lever to thered (warm) area or to the desiredtemperature.

[IP00880(ALL)08/95] 3. Set the fan at the desired speed.

[IP00890(ALL)08/95] To defrost the windshield and the side windows:

[IP00900(ALL)08/95] 1. Move the function selector lever to thedefrost symbol.

[IP00910(ALL)08/95] When the defrost symbol is selected, most ofthe air is directed to the windshield and asmall amount is directed toward the sidewindows. The defrost mode also helps defoginterior window surfaces.


[IP00930(ALL)08/95] 3. Set the fan speed at 4.

[IP00940(ALL)08/95] Heating and defrosting at the same time

[IP00950(ALL)08/95] To heat the inside of your vehicle and defrostthe windshield at the same time:

[IP00960(ALL)08/95] 1. Position the function selector lever atFLR/DEF.

[IP00970(ALL)08/95] When the function selector lever is in thisposition, air is split between the floor,windshield, and the side window demisters.

[IP00980(ALL)08/95] 2. Move the temperature lever to the red(warm) area or to the desired temperature.



144

[IP01000(ALL)08/95] Ventilating your vehicle with outside air

[IP01010(ALL)08/95] On mild days, you may want to ventilate yourvehicle with outside air. To open the vents:

[IP01020(ALL)08/95] 1. Move the function selector lever to PANEL.

[IP01030(ALL)08/95] 2. Move the temperature control lever to theblue (cool) area or to the desiredtemperature.


[IP01050(ALL)08/95] Bi-level operation:

[IP01060(ALL)08/95] 1. Move the function selector lever to thePNL/FLR position.

[IP01070(ALL)08/95] 2. Move the temperature control lever to thedesired temperature.

[IP01080(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The temperature of the air comingfrom the panel vents will be coolerthan the temperature of the air comingfrom the floor vents. The difference intemperatures can be controlled byadjusting the temperature control lever.The maximum difference intemperatures will occur when thetemperature control lever is in thecenter range (between the red [warm]and blue [cool] positions). This featureis especially useful on cool yet sunnydays, when the vehicle is warmed bythe sun yet you desire warmer air atyour feet.



145

*[IP06000(ALL)12/91] Tips for Controlling the Temperature inYour Vehicle

[IP06100(ALL)09/93] ❑To adjust the temperature inside your vehicle,use the temperature control lever. Move thecontrol between red (warm) and blue (cool)for comfort.

[IP06150(ALL)06/94] ❑Do not drive with the air inlet selector leverin the “recirculate” position (MAX A/C onheating and air conditioning systems orRECIRC on heating only systems). Drivingwith the climate control system in this modemay cause severe window fogging.

*[IP06700(ALL)12/03] ❑Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from thearea below the windshield on the outside ofyour vehicle. They could block the air intake.

[IP06725(ALL)06/94]


[IP06750(ALL)06/94] ❑Under normal conditions, the system shouldbe left in PANEL, PNL/FLR, FLOOR,FLR/DEF, or the defrost position. This allowsthe vehicle to “breathe” through the air vents.

[IP06775(ALL)06/94] ❑To prevent fogging of the windshield in cooland humid weather, set the function selectorlever to the defrost position before startingthe engine.


146

*[IP06800(ALL)06/94] Heating and Air Conditioning System(If equipped)

[IP06900(ALL)07/93] You can heat the inside of your vehicle, defrostthe windshield, and turn on the air conditioningby using the climate controls on the center ofthe instrument panel.

[IP06950(ALL)06/94]


The heating and air conditioning controls

[IP07400(ALL)06/93] Refer to Tips for Controlling the Temperature inYour Vehicle in the previous section for hints ontemperature control.

*[IP07402(ALL)06/95] Turning on the heat

*[IP07405(ALL)06/95] To heat the inside of your vehicle:

[IP07410(ALL)08/95] 1. Move the function selector lever to PANEL,PNL/FLR, FLOOR, FLR/DEF, or V(Defrost). See The controls earlier in thischapter for a description of these positions.


*[IP07420(ALL)06/95] 3. Set the fan at the desired speed.


147

[IP07425(ALL)06/95] Heating and defrosting at the same time

[IP07430(ALL)08/95] 1. Position the function selector lever toFLR/DEF.

[IP07435(ALL)08/95] 2. Move the temperature lever to the red(warm) area or to the desired temperature.


[IP07460(ALL)06/93] To defrost the windshield and sidewindows:

[IP07480(ALL)08/95] 1. Move the function selector lever to the V(defrost) symbol.

[IP07490(ALL)06/95] When the defrost symbol is selected, most ofthe air is directed to the windshield and asmall amount is directed toward the sidewindows. The defrost mode also helps defoginterior window surfaces.


[IP07542(ALL)06/94] NOTE: In temperatures greater than 45˚F (7˚C),press the A/C button on in order todehumidify the incoming air andenhance defogging performance.


[IP07550(ALL)09/89] Turning on the air conditioning

*[IP07575(ALL)09/93] To cool your vehicle quickly in warm weather:

[IP07600(ALL)08/95] 1. Press the A/C button.

[IP07650(ALL)10/93] 2. Move the temperature control lever to theblue (cool) area.


148

[IP07710(ALL)06/94] 3. Move the function selector lever to the MAXA/C position.

[IP07720(ALL)06/94] When the function selector lever is in theMAX A/C position, cooled interior air isrecirculated through the system. Thisposition is more economical than continuallycooling outside air.


*[IP09100(ALL)09/93] If the inside of your vehicle is very warm,drive for a few minutes with the windowsdown. This forces most of the hot, stale airout of the vehicle and helps the airconditioning cool the vehicle faster.

*[IP09300(ALL)07/93] Cooling your vehicle with outside air

[IP09350(ALL)06/94] Use any function selector lever position exceptfor MAX A/C to cool your vehicle with outsideair. Cooling your vehicle in this way brings inoutside air and is quieter but less economicalthan using recirculated air.

*[IP09750(ALL)07/93] To cool your vehicle using outside air:

[IP09800(ALL)08/95] 1. Press the A/C button.

[IP09820(ALL)10/93] 2. Move the function control lever to PANELor to the desired position.

[IP09830(ALL)10/93] 3. Move the temperature control lever to theblue (cool) area.


[IP11100(ALL)07/93] To ventilate your vehicle with outside air

[IP11150(ALL)07/93] In mild weather, use the outside, cooler air toventilate the vehicle. You will get better fueleconomy by not using the air conditioning.


149

[IP11300(ALL)07/93] To ventilate your vehicle using the vents:

[IP11350(ALL)12/89] 1. Be sure that the A/C is off.

[IP11400(ALL)11/89] 2. Move the function selector lever to PANEL.

[IP11500(ALL)12/89] When PANEL is selected, outside air isdirected out the instrument panel registers.

[IP11550(ALL)07/93] 3. Move the temperature control lever to theblue (cool) area or to the desiredtemperature.


[IP20000(ALL)06/95] Bi-level operation:

[IP20100(ALL)06/95] 1. Move the function selector lever to thePNL/FLR position.

[IP20200(ALL)06/94] 2. Turn on the air conditioning, if desired.

[IP20300(ALL)06/94] 3. Move the temperature control lever to thedesired temperature.

[IP20400(ALL)06/95] NOTE: The temperature of the air comingfrom the panel vents will be coolerthan the temperature of the air comingfrom the floor vents. The difference intemperatures can be controlled byadjusting the temperature control lever.The maximum difference intemperatures will occur when thetemperature control lever is in thecenter range (between the red [warm]and blue [cool] positions). This featureis especially useful on cool yet sunnydays, when the vehicle is warmed bythe sun yet you desire warmer air atyour feet.



150

*[IP21650(ALL)06/95] Rear Window Defroster (If equipped)

[IP21700(ALL)09/89] The defroster for the rear window clears frost,fog, and thin ice from the inside and outsiderear window.

[IP21900(ALL)09/95] The button for the rear window defroster is onthe instrument panel to the right of the steeringcolumn.

[IP21925(ALL)04/94]


The button that controls the rear window defroster

*[IP22400(ALL)02/95] To defrost the rear window:

*[IP22500(ALL)02/95] 1. Clear any snow from the rear window.

*[IP22600(ALL)09/93] 2. Get in your vehicle and start the engine.

[IP22700(ALL)06/93] 3. Press the rear window defrost button. TheON indicator will illuminate.

[IP22800(ALL)12/89] 4. When the rear window is clear, push thebutton again to turn off the defroster.

[IP23000(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Do not use sharp objects to scrape theinside of the rear window or useabrasive cleaners to clean the inside ofthe rear window surface. You coulddamage the heating elements, whichare bonded to the inside surface of therear window.


151

%*[IP23600(ALL)01/95] The Interior and Exterior Lights%*[IP23700(ALL)01/95] Turning On the Exterior Lights

[IP23750(ALL)08/95] To turn on your headlamps, parking lamps, sidemarkers, license lamps, instrument panel lamps,and tail lamps, twist the knob at the end of theturn signal lever located to the left of thesteering wheel.

[IP23920(ALL)08/95] To turn on the parking lamps, side markerlamps, instrument panel lamps, license lamps,and tail lamps, rotate the knob to the firstposition.

[IP23930(ALL)03/95] To turn on the headlamps in addition to theother lamps, rotate the knob to the secondposition.

[IP23950(ALL)03/95]


The lever for the headlamps, parking lamps and tail lamps

[IP25400(ALL)12/89] To change your headlamps from low to highbeam, push the turn signal lever away from youuntil it latches, and release.

*[IP25600(ALL)03/93] For more information about how the high beamheadlamps work, see Steering column controls inthe Index.


152

%*[IP25605(ALL)01/95] Daytime Running Light System

*[IP25610(ALL)03/95] (Canadian vehicles only)

*[IP25615(ALL)03/95] The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system turnsthe high beam headlamps on, with a reducedlight output, when:

*[IP25619(ALL)03/95] ❑The headlamp system is in the OFF position,and

*[IP25620(ALL)03/95] ❑The vehicle is running, and

*[IP25625(ALL)01/95] ❑The vehicle has a fully released parkingbrake.

*[IP25630(ALL)05/95] The high beam indicator light on the instrumentcluster will not be on.

*[IP25640(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) systemwill not illuminate the tail lamps andparking lamps. Turn on your headlampsat dusk. Failure to do so may result in acollision.


153

[IP25710(E )08/95] Fog Lamps (If equipped)

[IP25720(E )10/91] The fog lamps switch is located to the left of thesteering wheel on the instrument panel. The foglamps will operate only when the low beamheadlamps are on.

[IP25730(E )09/95]


Fog lamp switch

%*[IP25735(ALL)08/95] Cleaning the Exterior Lamps

*[IP25740(ALL)08/95] Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solventsor abrasive cleaners to clean the lamps, as thesemay cause scratches or crack the lamps.

%*[IP29800(ALL)01/95] Lighting Up the Interior and InstrumentPanel

[IP29900(ALL)09/89] You can brighten or dim the lights in theinstrument panel.

[IP29910(ALL)12/89] To do this, turn the instrument panel dimmerthumbwheel located on the instrument panel tothe left of the turn signal lever.


154

[IP29915(ALL)03/95] Interior Lamps

[IP29920(ALL)07/93] Your vehicle has an interior lamp for yourconvenience. You can set it to automatically turnon whenever a door is open, or you can set it tostay on or off.

[IP29930(ALL)08/93]


The courtesy lamps on the overhead lamp dome

*[IP30900(ALL)02/95] Dome/Map/Reading Lamps (If equipped)

*[IP31000(ALL)01/94] Your vehicle may have a map lamp for thepassenger and one for the driver.

[IP31050(ALL)10/89]


The courtesy and map lamps

[IP31500(ALL)02/94] To turn on the map lamps, push the switchesnext to each lamp. If your vehicle is equippedwith a moon roof, you will have a different styleof map lamps. Refer to Moon roof in the Index.


155

%*[IP31550(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Interior Lamps

*[IP31560(ALL)04/95] Your interior dome lamps and map lamps areplastic and should be cleaned with a milddetergent diluted in water. Rinse them with clearwater.

[IP31750(ALL)02/95] High-Mount Brakelamp

[IP32000(ALL)06/93] Your vehicle is equipped with a high-mountbrakelamp. The high-mount brakelampilluminates whenever you apply the brakes.

[IP32410(E )12/89] On 4-door hatchback, 2-door hatchback andwagon models, the high-mount brakelamp ismounted on the liftgate at the base of the rearwindow.

[IP32450(E )12/91] On the 4-door LX model, the high-mountbrakelamp is mounted on the base of the rearwindow.

[IP32500(E )04/94] On the Sport and GT, the high-mount brakelampis located between the spoiler and the trunk lid.


156

[IP32600(ALL)06/93] Rear Window Wiper and Washer(Available on wagons only)

[IP32630(ALL)09/95]

two third page art:0070259-A

[IP32640(ALL)06/93] To use the rear window wiper, push the rightside of the rear window wiper and washerswitch. Push the left side of the switch to turnthe rear window wiper off. To wash the rearwindow, push in the button marked WASH.Windshield washer fluid will stream onto therear window.


157

*[IP32700(ALL)04/95] Clock Controls on ElectronicRadios

[IP32800(ALL)09/95] Electronic radios have built-in clocks. Forcomplete operating instructions, refer to theElectronic Sound Systems chapter in this OwnerGuide.

*[IP36800(ALL)05/95] Radio

*[IP36900(ALL)08/95] For information about the radio in your vehicle,refer to the Electronic Sound Systems chapter inthis Owner Guide.

%*[IP37000(ALL)05/92] Radio Antenna

[IP37050(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle’s radio antenna is mounted on thetop of the windshield on the left (driver) side ofthe vehicle.

[IP37100(ALL)08/95] If your vehicle’s radio antenna is mounted nearthe top of the windshield on the left (driver)side of the vehicle, the antenna can be extendedby pulling it upward away from its mountingbase. To retract the antenna push it in toward itsmounting base.

[IP37200(ALL)08/95] NOTE: To receive the best reception, theantenna must be fully extended. Somewind noise is normal with the antennain the fully extended position. If theantenna is not fully extended, theresult may be weak or noisy radioreception.

[IP37300(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The retractable radio antenna must bepushed in prior to entering a car wash.Failure to retract the antenna couldresult in damage to the antenna,antenna base, or vehicle.


158

%*[IP37400(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Instrument Panel Lens

*[IP37450(ALL)04/95] Clean the instrument panel lens with a soft clothand a glass cleaner, such as Ford Ultra-ClearSpray Glass Cleaner, or equivalent. Do not usepaper towel or an abrasive cleaner to clean thelens as these may cause scratches.


159

Steering Column Controls

*[SC00400(ALL)01/95] The controls on the steering column and wheelare designed to give you easy access to thecontrols while you are driving.

%*[SC00500(ALL)01/95] The Turn Signal Lever

*[SC00600(ALL)01/95] You can use the turn signal lever on the left sideof the steering column to:

*[SC00700(ALL)07/94] ❑operate the turn signals

*[SC00800(ALL)01/95] ❑ turn the high beams on/off

*[SC00900(ALL)05/95] ❑ flash the lamps

%*[SC01100(ALL)01/95] Turn Signals

[SC01150(ALL)08/95]


Turn signal operation

[SC01200(ALL)08/95] If the turn indicator light in the instrumentpanel does not illuminate or remains on (doesn’tflash) when you signal a turn, the turn signalingsystem is malfunctioning. Have this conditioncorrected as soon as possible, but make sure thatyou use the accepted hand signals in themeantime.

File:07ctsce.exUpdate:Tue Sep 19 14:47:40 1995

160

[SC01250(ALL)08/95] High Beams and Flashing the Lamps

[SC01300(ALL)08/95]


High beams and flashing the lamps

[SC01350(ALL)08/95] Windshield Wipers and Washer

[SC01400(ALL)08/95] To turn on the windhsield wipers, the ignitionkey must be turned to the ON or ACC position.

[SC01450(ALL)08/95]


Windshield wipers and washer

[SC01500(ALL)08/95] To set the interval wipers, rotate the knob at theend of the turn signal lever toward or awayfrom the instrument panel to the intervaloperation you desire.


161

[SC01550(ALL)08/95] To clean the windshield, push in the end of thewiper knob. For a constant spray, keep the knobpushed in. After you release the knob, thewipers operate for two or three cycles beforeturning off (if wipers were off) or retruning tothe interval setting selected.

[SC01600(ALL)08/95] Do not try to clean the windshield when thewasher fluid container is empty or activate thewashers at any time for more than 15 secondscontinuously. This could damage the washerpump system.

[SC01650(ALL)08/95] RWARNING

In freezing weather, warm up thewindshield with the defroster before youuse the washer fluid. If you do not dothis, the washer solution may freeze onthe windshield and obscure your vision.This may result in a collision, possiblyinjuring you and others.

[SC01700(ALL)08/95] For information about refilling the washer fluidor replacing your windshield wiper blades, seeWindshield washer fluid and wipers in the Index.


162

%*[SC05320(ALL)03/95] Hazard Flasher[SC05340(ALL)08/95]


Using the hazard flasher switch

*[SC05360(ALL)03/95] The hazard flasher serves as a warning to otherdrivers to be careful when approaching orpassing your vehicle.

*[SC05400(ALL)08/95] The flashers work whether your vehicle isrunning or not. The flashers work for up to twohours when the battery is fully charged and ingood condition without draining the batteryexcessively. If the flashers run for longer thantwo hours or if the battery is not fully charged,the battery power can be drained.


163

%*[SC05600(ALL)01/95] Horn

*[SC05800(ALL)03/94] To sound the horn, push the pad in the center ofthe steering wheel. Check the horn regularly tobe sure it operates properly.

[SC05850(ALL)04/94]


The horn located on the steering wheel

*[SC06275(ALL)10/91] Tilt Steering Column(If equipped)

*[SC06325(ALL)02/95] RWARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel when thevehicle is moving. You could lose controlof the vehicle and injure someone.


164

[SC06350(ALL)06/94]


The lever to tilt the steering column

*[SC06400(ALL)09/95] To change the position of the steering wheel,push the release lever under the steering columnaway from you. Tip the steering wheel to thedesired position. Pull the lever back into place tolock the steering wheel.

%*[SC07400(ALL)03/91] Speed Control (If equipped)

*[SC07500(ALL)06/95] If your vehicle has speed control, you canautomatically maintain a constant speed at orabove 30 mph (50 km/h).

*[SC07510(ALL)06/95] Use of radio transmitting equipment that is notFederal Communications Commission (FCC) orin Canada the Canadian Radio andTelecommunications Commission (CRTC)approved may cause the speed control tomalfunction. Therefore, use only properlyinstalled FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radiotransmitting equipment in your vehicle.


165

[SC07525(ALL)08/95]


The speed control switches on the steering wheel

[SC08300(ALL)08/95] To set the speed control

[SC08400(ALL)08/95]



166

[SC08500(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic transaxle, and if your speedincreases above your set speed whiledriving in k (Overdrive) on adownhill grade, you may want to shiftto D (Drive). This will reduce vehiclespeed. Speed control cannot reduce thevehicle speed if it goes above your setspeed on a downhill grade.

[SC08550(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a5-speed manual transaxle, and if yourspeed increases above your set speedwhile driving in 5 (fifth) gear on adownhill grade, you may want to shiftto 4 (Fourth) gear to reduce vehiclespeed. Depressing the clutch pedalcancels speed control, therefore speedcontrol must be reset by pressing theSET ACCEL or RESUME switches.Speed control cannot reduce the vehiclespeed if it goes above your set speedon a downhill grade.

[SC09600(ALL)08/95] RWARNING

To keep control of your vehicle, do notuse the speed control in heavy traffic oron roads that are winding, slippery, orunpaved.

[SC09650(ALL)08/95] If you want to speed up momentarily or regainpreset speed on hills when the speed control isoperating, accelerate using the accelerator pedal.Manually accelerating to a higher speed does notinterfere with the speed control; when you takeyour foot off the accelerator, the vehicle returnsto the set speed.


167

[SC09700(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Do not shift to N (Neutral) when usingthe speed control. This will cause theengine to overspeed.

[SC09750(ALL)09/95] When driving uphill, especially with a heavyload, significant speed drops may occur. If thespeed drops more than 8 to 14 mph(13-23 km/h) the automatic speed control willcancel. You may need to control your speedmanually while driving up steep grades in orderto maintain the selected speed.

[SC09800(ALL)08/95] To turn off the speed control or to resetspeed:

[SC09850(ALL)08/95]


[SC09900(ALL)08/95] The speed control is turned off each time youturn off the vehicle.


168

[SC09950(ALL)08/95] To cancel speed control and then resume aset speed

[SC10000(ALL)08/95]


[SC10050(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Use of radio transmitting equipmentthat is not Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) or in Canada theCanadian Radio TelecommunicationsCommission (CRTC) approved maycause the speed control to malfunction.Therefore, use only properly installedFCC approved radio transmittingequipment in your vehicle.


169

Features

*[FV00410(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle has a variety of features designedfor your comfort, convenience and safety. Readthis chapter to find out about standard andoptional features.

%*[FV00500(ALL)01/95] Doors[FV00750(ALL)06/94]


The outside and inside of doors (driver’s side shown)

File:08ctfve.exUpdate:Tue Sep 19 14:50:19 1995

170

%*[FV00825(ALL)04/95] Power Door Locks (If equipped)

[FV00835(ALL)08/95] When you close the doors after you lock themwith the power door locks, the doors remainlocked. If the power mechanism ever fails, themanual door locks will override the power locks.

[FV00850(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Vehicles equipped with power lockshave a safety feature which allows youto unlock one or both front doors fromeither door lock key cylinder.

[FV00900(ALL)08/95]


Locking and unlocking doors with the key

[FV01701(ALL)03/95] Childproof Locks for the Rear Doors(4-door and wagon models)

*[FV01800(ALL)03/95] In addition to standard or power locks, yourvehicle has childproof locks for the rear doors. Ifyou set these locks, the rear doors cannot beopened from the inside of the vehicle. The doorscan still be opened from the outside when thelock knobs are raised.


171

[FV02050(ALL)06/94]


The child lock lever

*[FV02300(ALL)03/95] To set the childproof lock on each rear door,open the rear door.

[FV02500(ALL)02/95] Find the lever with the word LOCKED in greenletters. Move the lever down.

*[FV02780(ALL)03/95] To release the childproof lock, open the reardoor from the outside.

[FV02850(ALL)06/95] Move the lever up.


172

%*[FV09400(ALL)02/95] Windows

*[FV09501(ALL)08/95] Operating the Windows Manually

[FV09600(ALL)04/95] To manually open and close the side windows,turn the hand crank.

[FV09650(ALL)04/94]


The inside of the door


173

%*[FV09901(ALL)03/91] Using the Power Windows (If equipped)

[FV09925(ALL)08/95] To use your power windows, the ignition switchmust be in the ON position.

[FV09975(ALL)08/95] RWARNING

Do not let children play with the powerwindows. They may seriously hurtthemselves.

[FV10000(ALL)09/95]

two-thirds page art:0070284-A


174

[FV10150(E )02/91] Rear Quarter Swing-out Windows (2-doorhatchback models only)

[FV10175(E )10/91] The rear quarter swing-out windows may beopened or closed by releasing the window latch.

[FV10185(E )02/91] To open the window, pull the latch toward youand push the window outward until the latchsnaps into the opened position.

[FV10190(E )12/89] To close the window, pull the latch toward you,then push it toward the rear of the car until itsnaps shut. Make sure the window is securelyclosed.

[FV10195(E )12/89]


The rear quarter swing-out window

%*[FV11200(ALL)02/95] Moon Roof (If equipped)

*[FV11300(ALL)03/95] You can move the moon roof back to open theglass panel, or you can tilt it up to ventilate thevehicle.

[FV11400(ALL)07/94] The roof console SLIDE switch is used to openand close the moon roof. Press and hold theswitch until the desired position is reached. Atthe fully closed position, the motor automaticallyturns off.


175

[FV11450(ALL)06/94]


The moon roof controls

[FV11550(ALL)12/89] To open the moon roof, press and hold the rearportion of the switch marked SLIDE.

[FV11650(ALL)12/89] To close the moon roof, press and hold the frontportion of the switch marked SLIDE.

[FV11750(ALL)09/89] To move the moon roof into the vent positionwhen the glass panel is closed, press and holdthe UP portion of the switch marked TILT.

[FV11850(ALL)09/89] To close the moon roof from the vent position,press and hold the DOWN portion of the switchmarked TILT.

*[FV11950(ALL)01/95] Occasionally wiping the outside guide rail coversof the moon roof with a clean cloth will helpkeep the moon roof working properly.

*[FV12250(ALL)01/95] RWARNING

Do not let children play with the moonroof. They may seriously hurt themselves.

[FV12260(ALL)08/93] To turn on a map lamp, press the map lampswitch. Press the switch again to turn the maplamp off.


176

[FV12275(ALL)10/91] What to do if the moon roof will notoperate

[FV12325(ALL)06/94] If your moon roof becomes stuck in the openposition, you may close it manually. To movethe moon roof manually:

[FV12350(ALL)06/94]


Manually operating the moon roof with the handle

[FV12375(ALL)06/94] 1. Remove the manual override access panelfrom the moon roof console by sliding itrearward.

[FV12450(ALL)06/94] 2. Find the manual override handle in theowner portfolio in the glove compartmentand fit it into the hex nut in the overheadmoon roof control panel.

[FV12475(ALL)06/94] 3. Turn the handle counterclockwise to closethe moon roof.

[FV12525(ALL)10/91] Have your moon roof serviced by a qualifiedtechnician as soon as possible.


177

%*[FV12700(ALL)01/95] Seats%*[FV12702(ALL)04/95] Head Restraints

*[FV12704(ALL)02/95] If you use them properly, head restraints areintended to help protect your head and neck ina collision.

[FV12715(ALL)08/93] You can adjust the front seat head restraints foryour comfort and protection. The rear seat headrests do not adjust.

[FV12725(ALL)12/91]


The adjusting head restraint


178

*[FV12726(ALL)05/95] A head restraint helps protect you best if youposition it behind your head and not behindyour neck.

[FV13100(ALL)08/95] You can move the front seats forward orbackward or tilt the backs of the seats forwardor backward.

[FV13150(ALL)08/95]



179

[FV13200(ALL)08/95] To move the seat forward or backward:

[FV13250(ALL)08/95]

three fourths page art:0070286-A


180

[FV13300(ALL)08/95] To recline the seatback:

[FV13350(ALL)09/95]

full page art:0070287-A


181

[FV13400(ALL)08/95] To gain access to the rear seat on the driver orpassenger side (2-door version only).

[FV13450(ALL)08/95]


[FV13500(ALL)08/95] The seatback will return to its set reclinedposition when pushed back.


Rear seat passengers should not lean onthe front seatback while the vehicle is inmotion. A seatback which is foldedforward even a small degree may not lockproperly in the event of a sudden stop orcollision. Do not allow packages or otherobjects to interfere with the normalpositions of the seatback or the emergencyseatback release. This may prevent theseatback from locking in the event of asudden stop or collision and could causepersonal injury.


182

[FV13600(ALL)08/95] Fold-Down Rear Seats

[FV13650(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle is equipped with either a one-pieceor split folding rear seat. The rear seatback canbe folded down to provide additional cargospace.

[FV13700(ALL)08/95] NOTE: When folding down the rear seatback,the safety belt tongue should bedisengaged.

[FV13750(ALL)08/95] To lower the rear seatback:

[FV13800(ALL)09/95]


[FV13850(ALL)08/95] To raise the seatback, lift the seatback rearwarduntil it latches. Make sure the seatback is lockedin position by pushing it forward and backward.


183


If you do not securely latch the seatbackin the upright position, the seatback orobjects could be thrown forward during asudden stop or collision, possibly injuringyou or other passengers.


Luggage or other cargo should not bepiled higher than the seatbacks. This willhelp keep items from being thrown aboutand injuiring people in a collision orsudden stop.


To avoid the possiblity of burn injuries,do not remove the floor carpet in thecargo area. Emission controls cause highexhaust temperatures under the floor.

[FV14650(ALL)08/95] NOTE: When returning the folding seats to theupright position, remember to returnthe shoulder belts to their properposition.

%*[FV16000(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Seats

*[FV16050(ALL)07/95] Leather and vinyl

[FV16100(ALL)06/95] For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with asoft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning,wipe the surface with a leather cleaner or a mildsoap.

%*[FV16150(ALL)04/95] Fabric

*[FV16200(ALL)05/95] Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broomor a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spotsimmediately. Follow the directions that comewith the cleaner.


184

*[FV16250(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on asmall, hidden area of fabric. If thefabric’s color or texture is adverselyaffected by a particular cleaner, do notuse it.

%*[FV23600(ALL)01/95] Mirrors

*[FV23900(ALL)08/95] You can tilt the mirror from day to nightposition to reduce the glare from the headlampsof vehicles behind you. Move the tab towardyou for the night position and away from youfor the day position.

[FV23950(ALL)06/93]


The rearview mirror


185

%*[FV24800(ALL)05/95] Side View Mirrors

[FV24850(ALL)11/93] The standard side mirror is manually adjustedby using the remote lever.

[FV24875(ALL)03/93]


The side view mirror

[FV24900(ALL)06/93] Electric Remote Control Mirrors(If equipped)

[FV24925(ALL)04/94] If your vehicle has dual electric remote controlmirrors, you can control both side view mirrorswith one switch. The ignition key must be in theACC or ON position to operate the electricremote control mirror switch.

[FV24960(ALL)04/94]


The electric remote control mirror switch


186

[FV24975(ALL)08/95] To adjust the driver-side mirror, set the mirrorselection switch to the L position. To adjust thepassenger-side mirror, set the selection switch tothe R position.

[FV25025(ALL)03/91] After you choose the mirror you want to adjust,you can move the mirror in any of fourdirections. Move the knob in the direction youwould like the mirror to move. After completingadjustment, move the switch to the centerposition to avoid moving the mirror by mistake.


The side view mirror on the right makesobjects appear smaller and farther awaythan they actually are.

[FV27280(ALL)06/95] Do not clean the plastic housing of any rearviewmirror with fuel or other petroleum-basedcleaning products.


187

[FV31050(ALL)08/95] Cupholder and Tray (If equipped)[FV31060(ALL)04/94] Your vehicle may have a removable cupholder

and storage tray for your convenience.

[FV31062(ALL)04/94] If you have the removable cupholders andstorage tray, they can be washed in adishwasher.

[FV31070(ALL)07/93]


The cupholder and tray


Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hardobjects can injure you in a collision.


188

[FV33210(ALL)03/95] Hatchback or Trunk[FV33245(ALL)06/94] Using the Remote Control for the Trunk or

Hatchback (If equipped)

[FV33250(ALL)06/94] Your vehicle may have a remote control releasethat allows you to open the trunk or hatchbackfrom inside your vehicle. To release the trunk orhatchback, pull up on the release lever locatedon the floor between the driver’s seat and thedoor.

[FV33255(ALL)09/95]

two third page art:0070089-C

The remote control trunk release


189

[FV38502(E )12/89] Cargo Area Cover[FV38503(E )12/89] This removable cover hides cargo in the luggage

compartment. The cover lifts automatically whenyou open the hatchback.

[FV38505(E )06/94]


The lift cords on the hatchback

[FV38510(E )04/94] RWARNING

Do not place any items on the cargo areacover. They may make it difficult to seeout the window, or they could bedangerous if they strike any occupants ofthe vehicle in the case of a sudden stop orcollision.


190

*[FV38512(E )11/91] To remove the luggage compartment cover:

*[FV38514(E )12/89] 1. Raise the hatchback to the fully openposition.

[FV38516(E )07/93] 2. From the outside of your vehicle, unhookthe looped end of the nylon lift cords fromthe pins in the hatchback.

[FV38519(E )12/91] 3. Grasp the rear of the cargo cover and holdthe cover at a 30-degree angle before slidingit out of the mounting clips.

[FV38521(E )06/94]


The cargo cover push pins and hinge pins

[FV38522(E )07/93] 4. Remove the cargo cover from your vehicle.


191


The cover may cause injury in a suddenstop or accident if it is not securelyinstalled. Therefore, the cover shouldeither be securely installed or removedfrom the vehicle. To be securely installed,the cover must be attached to the bracketsand the two cords must be fastened.

*[FV38526(E )11/91] To install the luggage compartment cover:

*[FV38528(E )12/89] 1. Raise the hatchback to the fully openposition.

[FV38531(E )09/93] 2. Place the cargo cover on the rear trim panelsso that the hinge pins rest in front of themounting clips behind the seatback.

[FV38533(E )03/91] 3. Push the hinge pins into the mounting clipson the rear trim panel.

[FV38534(E )12/89] 4. Connect the cord loops to the pins in thesides of the hatchback.

*[FV38536(E )12/89] 5. Close the hatchback.


To prevent the possibility of injuries, thefasteners for the cargo area cover must beproperly attached to the mounting clips onthe rear trim panels.


192

[FV38538(ALL)12/89] Wagon

*[FV38539(ALL)01/95] Sliding Shade

[FV38541(ALL)09/89] If you have a wagon, you have a sliding shadethat you can use to hide any cargo you have inthe rear storage area.

*[FV38542(ALL)03/91] To install the shade:

[FV38543(ALL)03/93]


The location of the mounting brackets

*[FV38544(ALL)05/90] 1. Position the shade in the mounting bracketslocated behind the rear seat on each reartrim panel.

[FV38546(ALL)02/94] Connect the tethered safety clips as in theprevious illustration. The tongue end of theshade should face the rear of your vehicle.

*[FV38548(ALL)03/93] 2. Grasp the end of the shade and pull ittoward you.


193

*[FV38550(ALL)05/90] 3. Hook the sides of the outstretched shade tonotch in the rear trim panels near the liftgateopening.


The cover may cause injury in a suddenstop or accident if it is left lying loose inthe vehicle or if it is not securelyinstalled. Therefore, the cover shouldeither be securely installed or removedfrom the vehicle. To be securely installed,the cover must be attached to the bracketsand to the tethered safety clips.

[FV38555(ALL)12/91]


The shade

*[FV38556(ALL)05/91] The shade is a wind-up type, just like a windowshade. Over time the shade may lose its springtension. If this happens, you can easily rewindthe shade with the help of another person.


194

*[FV38558(ALL)05/91] To rewind the shade:

[FV38560(ALL)06/94] 1. Remove the shade from its side mountingbrackets and take it out of your vehicle.

[FV38561(ALL)04/94] To remove it from your vehicle, detach thetethered mounting screws from the trim panelsand push one end of the tension rod toward theopposite side of the vehicle until the shade canbe removed from the mounting clips.

*[FV38562(ALL)05/91] 2. Extend the shade fully. Make sure thesmooth grain side is facing you (see Figure1).

*[FV38564(ALL)05/91] 3. Wrap the vinyl around the roller tube twotimes in the direction shown in Figure 1.

*[FV38566(ALL)05/91] 4. Tuck the edges of the vinyl inside the endcap with each wrap.

*[FV38568(ALL)05/91] 5. Fold the edges of the vinyl toward thecenter. Make sure the edges of the vinylclear the end cap slots (see Figure 2). Usemasking tape or a rubber band to hold thevinyl on the left side of the roller tube.

*[FV38570(ALL)05/91] 6. While holding the vinyl and roller tube asshown in Figure 2, push the right end cap(marked with an “R”) about 1/4 inch todisengage the clutch.

*[FV38572(ALL)05/91] 7. Wind the shade 14 revolutions in thedirection shown in Figure 2. (The winddirection is also marked on the end cap.)


195

[FV38574(ALL)06/94]


Figure 1

[FV38576(ALL)06/94]


Figure 2

*[FV38578(ALL)05/91] 8. Let go of the right end cap. The clutchshould now engage and stop the shade fromlosing its spring tension.

*[FV38580(ALL)05/91] 9. Unfold the vinyl and place it into the endcap slots.

*[FV38582(ALL)05/91] 10. With the vinyl fully wound around the rollertube, insert the shade into the side mountingbrackets. NOTE: The opening for the rightmounting bracket is narrower than the left.

*[FV38584(ALL)05/91] 11. Check to see that the shade operatesproperly.


196

[FV39000(ALL)12/89] Loading the Luggage Rack (If equipped -wagon model only)

[FV39100(ALL)07/93] If your vehicle is equipped with the optionalluggage rack, load your luggage as far back as itwill safely go on the rack. Do not carry morethan 120 pounds (54 kg) or it may cause thevehicle to exceed the gross vehicle weight rating(GVWR) or its gross axle weight rating (GAWRfront and rear), which are shown on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label.


197

Electron

icS

oun

dS

ystems

*[AS01100(ALL)08/95]

fullpageart:0060648-B

Com

pact

Disc

Rad

io

File:09ctase.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:51:59 1995

198

%*[AS01200(ALL)08/95] Compact Disc Radio

*[AS01250(ALL)08/95] The Compact Disc Radio combines the ElectronicStereo Radio with the Ford Compact Disc Player.

*[AS01300(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio/CDPlayer

*[AS01400(ALL)08/95] Most of the features of this unit work for bothradio and CD operation. Also, some of the knobsand buttons control several different functions,so be sure to read all of the operatinginstructions carefully.

*[AS01500(ALL)08/95] How to turn the radio on and off

*[AS01600(ALL)08/95] Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on.Press it again to turn it off.

*[AS01625(ALL)08/95] How to adjust the volume

*[AS01650(ALL)08/95] Press the +/s side of the “VOL” button toincrease/decrease the volume. Bars illuminate inthe display to show the relative volume level.

*[AS01675(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above acertain listening level when theignition switch is turned off, when theignition switch is turned back on, thevolume will come back to a “nominal”listening level. However, if the radiopower is turned off, the volume willremain in the position it was set atwhen radio power was switched off.

*[AS01700(ALL)08/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS01800(ALL)08/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desiredfrequency band. When in the radio mode,pushing the button more than once will alternatebetween AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions areused with the station memory buttons describedunder How to tune radio stations.

File:09ctase.exUpdate:Tue Sep 19 14:51:59 1995

199

%*[AS01900(ALL)08/95] How to tune radio stations

*[AS02000(ALL)08/95] There are four ways for you to tune in aparticular station. You can manually locate thestation using the “SCAN/TUNE” button,“SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station orselect the station by using the memory buttons,which you can set to any desired frequency.These four methods are described below.

*[AS02100(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to manuallytune

*[AS02200(ALL)08/95] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time (FM changes inincrements of 200kHz; AM changes inincrements of 10kHz) by first pressing the“SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows“TUNE”), then — within approximately fiveseconds —pressing and releasing either thetop a or bottom b half of the “SEEK”button. To change frequencies quickly, pressand hold down either the top or bottom halfof the “SEEK” button. While you aremanually tuning, the display will show ablinking “M”.

*[AS02300(ALL)08/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to anyallowable broadcast frequency, whether ornot a station is present on that frequency.(See All About Radio Frequencies in thissection.)

*[AS02400(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function

*[AS02500(ALL)08/95] This feature on your radio allows you toautomatically select listenable stations up ordown the frequency band. Press the top ahalf of the “SEEK” button to select the nextlistenable station up the frequency band.Press the bottom b half of the button toselect the next listenable station down thefrequency band. By pressing and holding thebutton, listenable stations can be passed overto reach the desired station.


200

*[AS02600(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to scanradio stations

*[AS02700(ALL)08/95] Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button onceenters the scan mode (display will indicate“SCN”). Pushing the top a half of the“SEEK” button will begin the scan mode upthe frequency band, stopping on eachlistenable station for approximately fiveseconds. Pushing the bottom b half of the“SEEK” button will begin the scan modedown the frequency band, again stopping oneach listenable station for approximately fiveseconds.

*[AS02800(ALL)08/95] To stop the scan mode on the presentlysampled station press the “SCAN/TUNE”button again.

*[AS03000(ALL)08/95] ❑Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons

%*[AS03100(ALL)08/95] Your radio is equipped with 5 stationmemory buttons. These buttons can be usedto select up to 5 preset AM stations and 10FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2). Followthe easy steps below to set these buttons tothe desired frequencies.

*[AS03200(ALL)08/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.

*[AS03400(ALL)08/95] 2. Press one of the memory preset buttons andhold the button until the sound returns. Thatstation is now held in memory on thatbutton.

*[AS03500(ALL)08/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each stationmemory preset button you want to set.


201

*[AS03515(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the Automatic Memory Load feature

*[AS03520(ALL)03/95] If no stations are in memory preset, you canactivate the Auto Memory Load feature bypressing and holding the “AUTO PRESET”button for approximately three seconds.Auto Memory Load sets all memory buttonsin AM, FM1 and FM2 sequentially by seekingout the first six strong stations for therespective band and storing them in memorybuttons 1-5. (FM2 will store the second set ofstrong stations from the FM band.)

*[AS03525(ALL)08/95] With Auto Memory Store, you cancontinually set strong stations into yourmemory buttons without losing your existingmemory presets, which is especially handywhile traveling. Your radio will automaticallyset your memory buttons to the strong localstations so you don’t have to continuallymanually tune to existing stations.

*[AS03530(ALL)08/95] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the“AUTO PRESET” button once. Your radiowill set the first five strong stations of theband you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into thememory buttons. The display will show“AUTO,” then run through the frequencies,stopping momentarily on the stations beingset into the memory buttons. The radio isnow in the “AUTO” mode and the displaywill show “AUTO” each time a preset isactivated.

*[AS03535(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than five strongstations in the frequency band, theremaining unfilled buttons will storethe last strong station detected on theband.


202

*[AS03540(ALL)08/95] After all stations have been filled, the radiowill begin playing the station stored onmemory button 1.

*[AS03545(ALL)08/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store modeand return to the manually-set memorybutton stations (or those stations set usingAuto Memory Load), simply push the“AUTO PRESET” button. Display will show“AUTO” then “OFF.” The next time AutoMemory Store is activated on that band, theradio will store the next set of five strongstations.

*[AS04400(ALL)08/95] Using the “AUDIO” button to adjust thetone balance and speaker output

*[AS04500(ALL)08/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response

*[AS04600(ALL)08/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “BASS.” Push the “+” sideof the “VOL” button to increase bass (more“lows”), and push the “-” side to decreasebass (less “lows”).

*[AS04700(ALL)08/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response

*[AS04800(ALL)08/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “TREB.” Push the “+” sideof the “VOL” button to increase treble (more“highs”), and push the “-” side to decreasetreble (less “highs”).

*[AS05050(ALL)08/95] ❑Adjusting speaker balance

*[AS05100(ALL)08/95] Balance control allows you to adjust thesound distribution between the right and leftspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “BAL.”Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button toshift the sound to the right speakers, andpush the “-” side to shift the sound to theleft speakers.


203

*[AS05150(ALL)08/95] ❑Adjusting speaker fader

*[AS05200(ALL)08/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sounddistribution between the front and rearspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “FADE.”Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button toshift the sound to the front speakers, andpush the “-” side to shift the sound to therear speakers.

*[AS05250(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display showrelative levels of bass and treble andpositions of speaker balance and faderfunctions after adjustments are made,then revert to volume level set.

%*[AS05300(ALL)08/95] Clock Operation

*[AS05350(ALL)08/95] When in the radio mode, push the “CLOCK”button to switch from radio frequency to clock.Only the clock numerals will be displayed in theclock mode — there is no A.M./P.M. indication.When in the clock mode, the time will bedisplayed until the button is pushed again.However, if you retune the radio while it is inthe clock mode, the new radio frequency will bedisplayed for approximately ten seconds andthen change back to clock.

*[AS05400(ALL)08/95] When in the CD mode, push the “CLOCK”button to change the display from elapsed timemode to track number mode to clock mode. Ifthe CD track selection is changed when you arein the clock or elapsed time mode, the new tracknumber will be displayed for approximately tenseconds and then revert back to the previousmode.

*[AS05425(ALL)08/95] The clock can also be viewed with the ignitionoff. Push the “CLOCK” button and the time willbe displayed momentarily.


204

*[AS05450(ALL)08/95] To set the clock, simultaneously press the“CLOCK” button and either the bottom (b) halfof the “SEEK” button to set hours, or the top(a) half of the “SEEK” button to set minutes.

*[AS05500(ALL)05/94] NOTE: The clock can be set with the radioand/or ignition on or off.

%*[AS06050(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls on Your New CompactDisc Player

*[AS06150(ALL)08/95] Your new Ford Compact Disc Player is capableof playing 12 cm or 8 cm discs, without anadapter. The Player operates when the power ison and a disc is inserted (label side up). Handlethe disc by its edge only. (Be sure to read andfollow all of the care and cleaning instructionsunder How To Take Care of and Clean Your CDPlayer and Discs.)

*[AS06200(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If after you insert a disc, the disc isejected and “ERROR” begins scrollingin the display, remove the disc andreinsert it right side up (label side up).

*[AS06250(ALL)08/95] The digital display on your CD player willeither show the track (selection) number or theelapsed time. (The display mode can be selectedby pressing the “CLOCK” button.) Indicators forplay (a), stop (X) and compression on (“C”)are also in the display. (These features aredescribed later.)

*[AS06300(ALL)08/95] Once a disc is inserted, operation of the CDplayer will override that of the radio.

*[AS06350(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The volume, bass, treble, balance andfader controls on the radio are alsoused with the CD player. Refer toearlier operating instructions on thesecontrols.


205

*[AS06400(ALL)08/95] How to insert a disc and begin play

*[AS06450(ALL)08/95] Insert one disc, label side up into the discopening. When inserted, the disc automaticallyloads into the unit and play starts at thebeginning of the first track (selection).

*[AS06500(ALL)08/95] When the disc reaches the end, the disc playerautomatically returns to the beginning of thedisc and resumes playing.

*[AS06550(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Once a disc is inserted, the discopening is secured to prevent theaccidental insertion of a second disc.

*[AS06600(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The CD player has heat protectioncircuitry to protect the laser diode. Ifthe temperature of the player reaches167˚F (75˚C), the heat detection circuitwill shut off the player and “TOOHOT” will scroll in the display forapproximately five seconds (radio willresume playing). When the temperaturereturns to normal operating range, theCD player will again be operational.

*[AS06650(ALL)08/95] How to stop and restart the CD player

*[AS06700(ALL)08/95] When a disc is loaded, the unit automaticallyenters the play mode and the play indicator ailluminates. To stop temporarily, press the“PLAY/STOP” button or the “AM/FM” button.The stop indicator X in the display illuminatesand operation returns to the radio mode. Toresume CD play, press the “PLAY/STOP”button once again.

*[AS06750(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If the ignition key is turned OFFduring play and then is set to the ONor ACCESSORY position, the CDplayer will resume playing in the modeit was in when ignition was turned off.


206

*[AS06800(ALL)08/95] How to fast forward or reverse your CDplayer

*[AS06850(ALL)08/95] To quickly search for a particular point in aselection, press the “FF” button (to fast forward)or the “REV” button (to reverse). While eitherbutton is pressed, the disc goes forward orbackward at two different speeds depending onhow long the button is held down. (Pressingeither button for more than three seconds willspeed up the process.) Release the button at thedesired point (found by watching the elapsedplaying time in the display or by listening to thesound during fast forward or reverse). Whenyou have reached the beginning of track 1, theCD player will begin playing.

*[AS06900(ALL)08/95] When you have reached the end of the disc bykeeping the fast forward button pressed, thedisplay will show “END” and the player will gointo pause mode. Push the “PLAY/STOP”button to begin playing the first track of thedisc, press the “REV” button to back up fromthe end of the disc, or use the “SEEK” functionto locate a desired track.

*[AS06955(ALL)08/95] Using the “SEEK” feature

*[AS06960(ALL)08/95] The “SEEK” feature allows you to quickly find aparticular selection on the disc.

*[AS06965(ALL)08/95] Press the bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” buttononce to repeat the current playing selection.Press the top (a) half of the “SEEK” button toadvance to the next selection.

*[AS06970(ALL)08/95] Pressing and holding the bottom (b) or top (a)half of the “SEEK” button will scroll backwardand forward respectively through the tracks.


207

*[AS07000(ALL)08/95] Using the “SCAN” function

*[AS07050(ALL)08/95] Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter thescan mode. Once in the scan mode, press the top(a) or bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” button toscan forward or reverse, respectively. The CDplayer will begin scanning the disc, stopping oneach listenable track for approximately eightseconds. This continues until you press the“SCAN/TUNE” button a second time. While inthe scan mode, the display shows the currentsampled track number.

*[AS07100(ALL)08/95] Special features of your CD player

*[AS07150(ALL)08/95] ❑Compression

*[AS07200(ALL)08/95] The compression feature will bring soft andloud passages closer together for a moreconsistent listening level.

*[AS07250(ALL)08/95] To turn the compression on, press the“COMP” button. When on, the compressionindicator (“C”) will appear in the display.Press the button again to turn off.

*[AS07300(ALL)08/95] ❑Automatic Disc Storage

*[AS07350(ALL)08/95] If the disc is ejected from the CD player butis not removed from the disc opening withinapproximately 10 seconds, the player willautomatically reload the disc for storage,unless the disc is automatically ejected due toa “focus error” (disc inserted upside down).In this case, the disc will not be automaticallyreloaded.


208

*[AS07400(ALL)08/95] How to eject the disc

*[AS07500(ALL)08/95] Push the “EJECT” button to stop play, eject thedisc and resume radio operation of your audiosystem.

*[AS07600(ALL)08/95] NOTE: You can eject the disc while the radiopower and/or ignition is on or off.

%*[AS08100(ALL)08/95] How To Take Care of and Clean Your CDPlayer and Discs

*[AS08200(ALL)08/95] To ensure the continued performance of yourFord Compact Disc Player, carefully read thefollowing precautions:

*[AS08300(ALL)08/95] ❑Always handle the disc by its edge. Nevertouch the playing surface.

*[AS08400(ALL)08/95] ❑Before playing, inspect the disc for anycontamination. If needed, clean the disc withan approved disc cleaner, such as theDiscwasherH Compact Disc Cleaner or theAllsop 3H Compact Disc Cleaner, by wipingfrom the center out to the edges. Do not usea circular motion to clean.

*[AS08500(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not clean discs with solvents such asbenzine, thinner, commercially availablecleaners or antistatic spray intended foranalog records.

*[AS08600(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight orheat sources such as defroster and floorheating ducts. Do not leave any discs in aparked car in direct sunlight where there maybe a considerable rise in temperature ordamage may result.


209

*[AS08700(ALL)08/95] ❑After playing, store the disc in its case.

*[AS08800(ALL)08/95] ❑ If a disc has already been inserted, do not tryto insert another disc. Doing so may damagethe disc player.

*[AS08900(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not insert anything other than a disc intothe disc player.

*[AS09000(ALL)08/95] CAUTION: The use of optical instruments withthis product will increase eye hazard as the laserbeam used in this compact disc player isharmful to the eyes. Do not attempt todisassemble the case. Refer servicing to qualifiedpersonnel only.

*[AS09100(ALL)08/95] Common Operating Conditions of YourCD Player

*[AS09200(ALL)08/95] The following information is designed to helpyou recognize typical situations that could bemistakenly interpreted as mechanicalmalfunctions of the disc player.

*[AS09300(ALL)08/95] ❑A disc is already loaded.

*[AS09400(ALL)08/95] ❑The disc is inserted with the label surfacedownward.

*[AS09500(ALL)08/95] ❑The disc is dusty or defective.

*[AS09600(ALL)08/95] ❑The player’s internal temperature is above140˚F (60˚C). Allow the player to cool offbefore operating.


210

*[AS09700(ALL)08/95] ❑Different manufacturers of compact discs mayproduce discs with different dimensions ortolerances, some of which may not be withinindustry standards or in accordance with theCD format. Because of this, a new disc that isfree of dust and scratches could be defectiveand may not play on your Ford CompactDisc Player.

*[AS09800(ALL)09/95] If play does not begin after the CD button ispushed:

*[AS09850(ALL)08/95] ❑The radio is not on.

*[AS09900(ALL)08/95] ❑The unit is in the stop mode.

*[AS10000(ALL)08/95] ❑Moisture may have condensed on the lenseswithin the unit. If this occurs, remove thedisc and wait approximately an hour until themoisture evaporates.

*[AS10100(ALL)08/95] If the sound skips:

*[AS10200(ALL)08/95] ❑Badly scratched discs or extremely roughroads will cause the sound to skip. Skippingwill not damage the disc player or scratch thediscs.


211

*[AS21800(ALL)04/95]

fullpageart:0060586-C

Electron

icS

tereoR

adio

File:09ctase.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:51:59 1995

212

*[AS21900(ALL)08/95]

fullpageart:0060587-C

Electron

icS

tereoR

adio

with

Cassette

File:09ctase.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:51:59 1995

213

%*[AS21905(ALL)08/95] Electronic Stereo and StereoCassette Radios

*[AS21910(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio

*[AS21915(ALL)08/95] How to turn the radio on and adjust thevolume

*[AS21920(ALL)08/95] Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on.Press it again to turn it off.

*[AS22050(ALL)04/94] Press the right (+) side of the “VOLUME”button to increase the volume. Press the left (-)side of the button to decrease the volume.Illuminated bars in the display show the relativevolume level.

*[AS22100(ALL)08/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS22210(ALL)07/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desiredfrequency band. Pushing the button more thanonce will alternate between AM, FM1 and FM2.These functions are used with the stationmemory buttons described under How to tuneradio stations.

*[AS22300(ALL)08/95] How to tune radio stations (Stereo Radio)

*[AS22400(ALL)08/95] There are three ways for you to tune in to aparticular station. You can manually locate thestation by using the “TUNE” button, “SEEK” thestation or select the station by using the memorypreset buttons, which you can set to any desiredfrequency.


214

%*[AS22450(ALL)08/95] How to tune radio stations (Stereo CassetteRadio)

*[AS22475(ALL)08/95] There are four ways for you to tune in to aparticular station. You can manually locate thestation by using Automatic Music Search(“AMS”), “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to thestation or select the station by using the memorybuttons, which you can set to any desiredfrequency.

*[AS22500(ALL)09/95] ❑Using the “TUNE” function (Stereo Radio)

*[AS22600(ALL)08/95] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time by pressing andreleasing either the right (+) or left (S) sideof the “TUNE” button. To change frequenciesquickly, press and hold down either the rightor left side of the “TUNE” button.

*[AS22650(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “AMS” function to manually tuneyour radio (Stereo Cassette Radio)

*[AS22675(ALL)08/95] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time by first pressing the“AMS” button (display shows “TUNE”) thenwithin approximately five seconds pressingand releasing either the right a or left bside of the “SEEK” button. To changefrequencies quickly, press and hold downeither the right or left side of the “SEEK”button.

*[AS22700(ALL)08/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to anyallowable broadcast frequency, whether ornot a station is present on that frequency.(See All About Radio Frequencies in thissection.)


215

*[AS22800(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function

*[AS22900(ALL)08/95] This feature on your radio allows you toautomatically select listenable stations up ordown the frequency band. Press the right aside of the “SEEK” button to select the nextlistenable station up the frequency band.Press the left b side of the button to selectthe next listenable station down thefrequency band. By holding the button down,listenable stations can be passed over to reachthe desired station.

*[AS23120(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function (Stereo CassetteRadio)

*[AS23150(ALL)08/95] Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scanmode. The radio will begin scanning up thefrequency band, stopping on each listenablestation for approximately a five-secondsampling. This continues until you press the“SCAN” button a second time.

*[AS23200(ALL)08/95] ❑Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons

*[AS23300(ALL)05/95] Your radio is equipped with 5 stationmemory buttons. These buttons can be usedto select up to 5 preset AM stations and 10preset FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2).

*[AS23400(ALL)08/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttonsto the desired frequencies:

*[AS23501(ALL)08/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.

*[AS23700(ALL)08/95] 2. Press one of the memory preset buttons andhold the button until the sound returns. Thatstation is now held in memory on thatbutton.

*[AS23800(ALL)08/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each stationmemory preset button you want to set.


216

*[AS23900(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,the clock and station memory presetbuttons will need to be reset.

*[AS24000(ALL)08/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speakeroutput of your radio

*[AS24100(ALL)08/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response

[AS24250(ALL)06/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “BASS.” Push the “+” sideof the “VOLUME” button to increase bass(more “lows”), and push the “-” side todecrease bass (less “lows”).

*[AS24300(ALL)08/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response

[AS24450(ALL)06/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “TREB.” Push the “+” sideof the “VOLUME” button to increase treble(more “highs”), and push the “-” side todecrease treble (less “highs”).

*[AS24500(ALL)08/95] Speaker features and operation

*[AS24600(ALL)08/95] ❑Adjusting speaker balance

[AS24750(ALL)06/95] Balance control allows you to adjust thesound distribution between the right and leftspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “BAL.”Push the “+” side of the “VOLUME” buttonto shift the sound to the right speakers, andpush the “-” side to shift the sound to theleft speakers.

*[AS24800(ALL)08/95] ❑Adjusting speaker fader

[AS24950(ALL)06/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sounddistribution between the front and rearspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “FADE.”Push the “+” side of the “VOLUME” buttonto shift the sound to the front speakers, andpush the “-” side to shift the sound to therear speakers.


217

%*[AS25000(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette TapePlayer

*[AS25500(ALL)08/95] How to insert a tape

*[AS25600(ALL)08/95] Insert a cassette (with the open edge to theright) firmly into the tape door opening, makingsure the cassette is completely in and “seated.”

*[AS25700(ALL)08/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape

*[AS25800(ALL)06/95] NOTE: The tape track or side numberindicated in the display does notnecessarily correspond to the tape trackor side number on the cassette label. Itis used only to indicate when the tapemechanism reverses tracks.

*[AS25848(ALL)05/94] ❑Using the Automatic Music Search (“AMS”)function with cassette tape player

*[AS25850(ALL)08/95] Press and hold the “AMS” button (“AMS”will appear in the display). Then, push theleft h button to rewind to the beginningof the current selection or press the rightg button to fast forward to the beginningof the next selection.

*[AS25900(ALL)09/95] ❑Fast forwarding the tape

*[AS26000(ALL)08/95] Push the right g button to fast forwardthe tape.

*[AS26100(ALL)08/95] ❑Rewinding the tape

*[AS26200(ALL)08/95] Push the left h button to rewind the tape.

*[AS26900(ALL)08/95] ❑How to change the side of the tape beingplayed

*[AS27000(ALL)08/95] The alternate track (other side) of the tapecan be selected at any time by pushing bothfast-wind buttons (h and g) at thesame time. The number in the display willalternate between 1 and 2.


218

*[AS27100(ALL)08/95] How to eject the tape

*[AS27250(ALL)08/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the“EJECT” button. The radio will resume playing.

*[AS27300(ALL)08/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature

*[AS27400(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufacturedunder license from Dolby LabsLicensing Corporation. “Dolby” anddouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

*[AS27500(ALL)08/95] Push the k/memory preset #3 button toactivate. Push again to deactivate.

%*[AS27510(ALL)08/95] Clock Operation

*[AS27520(ALL)08/95] How to view the clock mode

*[AS27530(ALL)08/95] Press the “CLOCK” button to alternate thefrequency and time in the display. In the clockmode, pressing any radio function willautomatically display the radio frequency forapproximately ten seconds before changing backto the clock mode.

*[AS27540(ALL)08/95] How to set the clock

*[AS27550(ALL)08/95] 1. Turn the radio on.

*[AS27560(ALL)08/95] 2. Press and hold in the “CLOCK” button,press the “SEEK” button left (b) to advancethe hours and right (a) to advance theminutes.

*[AS27570(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time withno AM/PM indications.


219

*[AS27600(ALL)08/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player andTapes

*[AS27700(ALL)08/95] In order to keep your cassette tape playerperforming the way it was meant to, read andfollow these simple precautions:

*[AS27800(ALL)08/95] ❑Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long orless should be used. Tapes longer than 90minutes are thinner and subject to breakageor may jam the tape player mechanism.

*[AS27900(ALL)08/95] ❑Protect cassettes from exposure to directsunlight, high humidity and extreme heat orcold. If they are exposed to extremeconditions, allow them to reach a moderatetemperature before playing.

*[AS28000(ALL)08/95] ❑Loose labels on cassette tapes can becomelodged in the mechanism. Remove any looselabel material before inserting a cassette.

*[AS28100(ALL)08/95] ❑ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten itbefore playing by putting your finger or apencil into one of the holes and turning thehub until the tape is tight.

*[AS28200(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not leave a tape in the cassette tapeplayer when not in use. High heat in thevehicle can cause the cassette to warp.

*[AS28300(ALL)08/95] ❑Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge toclean the tape player head after 10-12 hoursof play will help maintain the best playbacksound and proper tape operation.


220

%*[AS35200(ALL)08/95] Common Radio Reception Conditions

*[AS35300(ALL)08/95] Several conditions prevent FM reception frombeing completely clear and noise-free, such asthe following:

*[AS35400(ALL)08/95] 1. Distance/Strength

*[AS35500(ALL)08/95] The strength of the FM signal is directly relatedto the distance the signal must travel. Thelistenable range of an average FM signal isapproximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyondthis distance, the radio is operating in a fringearea and the signal becomes weaker.

*[AS35600(ALL)08/95] 2. Terrain

*[AS35700(ALL)08/95] The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) ofthe area over which the signal travels mayprevent the FM signal from being noise-free.

*[AS35900(ALL)08/95] If there is a building or large structure betweenthe antenna and station, some of the signal“bends” around the building, but certain spotsreceive almost no signal. Moving out of the“shadow” of the structure will allow the stationto return to normal.

*[AS36000(ALL)08/95] When the radio waves are reflected off objects orstructures, the reflected signal cancels the normalsignal, causing the antenna to pick up noise anddistortion. Cancellation effects are mostprominent in metropolitan areas, but also canbecome quite severe in hilly terrain anddepressed roadways.

*[AS36100(ALL)08/95] To minimize these conditions, a stereo/monoblend circuit has been incorporated into thissystem. This feature automatically switches aweak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal,which improves the quality of reception.


221

*[AS36200(ALL)08/95] Several sources of static are normal conditionson AM frequencies. These can be caused bypower lines, electric fences, traffic lights andthunderstorms.

*[AS36300(ALL)08/95] Another reception phenomenon is Strong SignalCapture and Overload. This can occur whenlistening to a weak station and when passinganother broadcast tower. The close station maycapture the more distant station, although thedisplayed frequency does not change. Whilepassing the tower, the station may switch backand forth a few times before returning to theoriginal station.

*[AS36400(ALL)08/95] When several broadcast towers are present(common in metropolitan areas) several stationsmay overload the receiver, resulting inconsiderable station changing, mixing anddistortion.

*[AS36500(ALL)08/95] Automatic gain control circuitry for both AMand FM bands has been incorporated into thissystem to reduce strong signal capture andoverload.

%*[AS36600(ALL)08/95] All About Radio Frequencies

*[AS36800(ALL)08/95] Not all frequencies will be assigned to a givenarea. This radio will tune to each of thesefrequencies using manual tune and no finetuning is necessary as radio stations may not useother frequencies.

*[AS36900(ALL)08/95] Some FM radio stations advertise a“rounded-off” frequency which is not thefrequency they actually broadcast on. Forexample, a radio station that is assigned afrequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99”even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FMbroadcast frequency.


222

%*[AS37000(ALL)08/95] Important Warranty and ServiceInformation

*[AS37100(ALL)08/95] Your sound system is warranted for three yearsor 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichevercomes first. Consult your vehicle warrantybooklet for further information. Ask your dealerfor a copy of this limited warranty.

*[AS37200(ALL)08/95] At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audiosystems with a comprehensive service and repairprogram. If anything should go wrong withyour Ford audio system, return to your dealerfor service. There is a nationwide network ofqualified Ford authorized repair centers to assistyou.


223

Driving Your Escort

*[DR00200(ALL)09/93] Procedures for driving your vehicle will varydepending on which type of transaxle yourvehicle has. You may be familiar with the term“transmission.” We use transaxle because it is amore accurate term for vehicles that havefront-wheel drive.

*[DR00300(ALL)07/95] Your vehicle will have one of the followingtypes of transaxles:

*[DR00500(ALL)11/94] ❑an automatic overdrive transaxle, or

*[DR00600(ALL)11/94] ❑a manual transaxle.

[DR00650(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle is equipped with an ElectronicEngine Control Module that limits engine speedswith a cut-out mode to promote durability.

%*[DR03500(ALL)01/95] Driving with an AutomaticOverdrive Transaxle

[DR03600(ALL)06/93] Your automatic overdrive transaxle providesfully automatic operation in either k(Overdrive) or D (Drive). Driving with the shiftselector in k (Overdrive) gives the best fueleconomy for normal driving conditions. Formanual control, start in L (Low) and then shiftmanually.

File:10ctdre.exUpdate:Tue Sep 19 14:53:34 1995

224

%*[DR03800(ALL)01/95] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear

*[DR04001(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Hold the brake pedal down while youmove the gearshift lever from position toposition. If you do not hold the brakepedal down, your vehicle may moveunexpectedly and injure someone.

*[DR04025(ALL)07/93] Using a Console-Mounted Gearshift

[DR04050(ALL)08/95] Since your vehicle has a console-mountedgearshift, you must depress the brake pedal,then push in the thumb button to move thegearshift to the position you choose.

*[DR04900(ALL)11/94] Once the gearshift is secure in the desiredposition, release the brake pedal and use theaccelerator as necessary.

[DR04950(ALL)06/94]


The automatic console-mounted gearshift lever

[DR05010(ALL)08/95] To move the gearshift out of P (Park), theignition must be turned to the ON position andthe brake pedal must be depressed. When thegearshift is in any other position except P (Park),the ignition key cannot be turned to LOCK or beremoved from the steering column. To removethe key, the gearshift must be in P (Park).


225

[DR05020(ALL)07/93] Your vehicle has a special shift-lock safetyfeature which prevents you from shifting out ofP (Park) without the brake pedal depressed. Toshift the transaxle out of the P (Park) position,the ignition must be in the ON position, thebattery must be supplying electrical power, andyour foot must be pressing on the brake pedal.

[DR05030(ALL)01/92] In the unlikely event that you cannot move theselector lever from the P (Park) position with thebrake pedal depressed, continue depressing thebrake. Then:

*[DR05035(ALL)06/95] 1. Remove the shift-lock override cap with a 1“or longer screwdriver.

[DR05038(ALL)02/94]


Shift-lock override

*[DR05040(ALL)03/93] 2. Insert the screwdriver into the shift-lockoverride opening and push the screwdriverhandle down.


226

[DR05045(ALL)06/94] NOTE: You may use the override handleprovided in your Owner Guideportfolio in place of a screwdriver.

*[DR05050(ALL)03/93] 3. Push and hold the thumb button.

*[DR05060(ALL)09/93] 4. Move the gearshift lever.

*[DR05070(ALL)07/95] If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using thealternate procedure described above, it ispossible that a fuse has blown and that yourbrakelamps may also not be functional. Pleaserefer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Escort inthis Owner Guide for instructions on checkingand replacing fuses.


DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTILYOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPSARE WORKING.

%*[DR05300(ALL)01/95] Driving

%*[DR05400(ALL)04/95] When to use j (Overdrive)

*[DR05500(ALL)04/95] j (Overdrive) is the usual driving position foran automatic overdrive transaxle. It works thesame way D (Drive) works, automaticallyupshifting or downshifting as the vehicle speedsor slows.

*[DR05600(ALL)04/95] However, j (Overdrive) also shifts into a fourthgear — an overdrive gear — when your vehiclecruises at a consistent speed for any length oftime. This fourth gear will increase your fueleconomy when you travel at cruising speeds.

*[DR05700(ALL)04/95] j (Overdrive) may not be appropriate forcertain terrain. If the transaxle shifts back andforth between third and fourth gears while youare driving on hilly roads or if your vehiclerequires additional power for climbing hills, shiftto D (Drive).


227

*[DR05800(ALL)06/95] When to use D (Drive)

*[DR06000(ALL)04/95] D (Drive) eliminates the excessive shiftingbetween third and fourth gears that your vehiclesometimes does when you are traveling throughhilly terrain in j Overdrive. It also gives moreengine braking to slow your vehicle ondowngrades than j Overdrive.

[DR06100(ALL)09/95] When to use L (Low)

[DR06200(ALL)08/93] Use L (Low) when more power is needed todrive up steep hills. It also gives more enginebraking than Drive when driving on hilly roads.

[DR06300(ALL)06/95] Do not go faster than 38 mph (60 km/h) in thisgear. You can upshift from L (Low) to Drive orfrom L (Low) to Overdrive at any speed.

[DR06320(ALL)09/95] Reverse

*[DR06340(ALL)08/95] With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position,the vehicle will move backward. You shouldalways come to a complete stop before shiftinginto or out of R (Reverse).

[DR06350(ALL)08/95] Neutral

[DR06379(ALL)09/95] In N (Neutral), the wheels of the transaxle arenot locked. Your vehicle will roll freely, even onthe slightest incline, unless the parking brake orbrakes are on.


228

*[DR06400(ALL)06/92] Parking

*[DR06500(ALL)11/94] Always come to a complete stop before you shiftinto P (Park). Make sure that the gearshift issecurely latched in P (Park). This locks thetransaxle and prevents the front wheels fromrotating.


Always set the parking brake fully andmake sure the gearshift is securely latchedin P (Park).


Never leave your vehicle unattendedwhile it is running.

*[DR06675(ALL)02/91] You can tell the gearshift is securely latchedwhen the thumb button has popped out. In thisposition the gearshift selector lever cannot bemoved unless the button is pushed in.


Hold the brake pedal down while youmove the gearshift lever from position toposition. If you do not hold the brakepedal down, your vehicle may moveunexpectedly and injure someone.


229

*[DR06900(ALL)01/89] Driving with a Manual Transaxle%*[DR07000(ALL)03/95] Using the Clutch

*[DR07100(ALL)11/94] In order to start the vehicle, the clutch pedalmust be fully depressed to the floor. Beforestarting the engine, make sure the vehicle is inNeutral and the parking brake is set.

*[DR07400(ALL)03/95] Do not drive with your foot resting on theclutch pedal and do not use the clutch to holdyour vehicle at a standstill while waiting on ahill. These actions will seriously reduce clutchlife.

%*[DR07600(ALL)03/95] Shifting the Gears

*[DR07700(ALL)11/94] The gearshift for a manual transaxle is mountedon the floor. The gearshift can be in one ofseven possible positions, as shown.

[DR07750(ALL)09/89]


The positions of the floor-mounted gearshift

%*[DR08000(ALL)03/95] Backing up

*[DR08100(ALL)03/95] To shift into R (Reverse):

*[DR08200(ALL)11/94] 1. Completely stop your vehicle.

*[DR08300(ALL)11/94] 2. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor andplace the gearshift lever in the Neutralposition. Do not release the clutch pedal.


230

[DR08370(ALL)06/94] 3. Push the gearshift lever completely to theright and then pull rearward on the gearshiftlever to engage the Reverse gear.

[DR08380(ALL)06/94] 4. If the Reverse gear is engaged, slowlyrelease the clutch pedal from the floor.

[DR08385(ALL)06/94] 5. If the Reverse gear is not engaged, do notrelease the clutch pedal from the floor. Placethe gearshift lever back in Neutral and thenmomentarily release the clutch pedal fromthe floor.

[DR08390(ALL)06/94] 6. Repeat steps 2 through 4.

[DR08400(ALL)08/95] Upshifting

*[DR08500(ALL)06/93] For normal acceleration, you should upshift atthe following speeds:

[DR08600(ALL)06/93]

ten pica chart:0070154-A


231

[DR08700(ALL)06/93] For cruising, you should upshift at the followingspeeds:

[DR08800(ALL)06/93]

ten pica chart:0070155-A

[DR09400(ALL)08/95] Upshift indicator light (If equipped)

[DR09500(ALL)09/93] After the engine warms up, the upshift light willcome on if you could get better fuel economy byshifting to the next higher gear. The vehicle willnot be harmed if the transaxle is not shiftedwhen the light comes on, but the vehicle willuse more fuel.

[DR09600(ALL)09/93] The shift indicator light can be ignored whenyou are downshifting, on steep hills, using theengine to ”brake“ the vehicle, or need morepower for a difficult acceleration.

%*[DR09700(ALL)05/95] Downshifting

*[DR09800(ALL)03/95] When you slow down or climb a steep hill,always downshift before the engine starts to losepower. Downshifting reduces the chance ofstalling and gives your vehicle better accelerationto increase speed again.

*[DR09900(ALL)03/95] When you drive down steep hills, downshiftinghelps you keep a safe speed and helps preventunnecessary wear on the brakes.


232

[DR10200(ALL)02/92] Do not attempt to shift into 1 (First) gear withthe clutch pedal depressed at speeds higher than10 mph (16 km/h). If you do, it could cause acomplete clutch failure, making your vehicleinoperative.

%*[DR15600(ALL)01/95] Steering Your Vehicle[DR15700(ALL)07/93] Your vehicle may be equipped with power

steering. Power steering uses energy from theengine to help steer your vehicle.

%*[DR15800(ALL)04/95] If the amount of effort needed to steer yourvehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, havethe power steering system checked. If the powersteering system breaks down (or if the engine isturned off), you can steer the vehicle manuallybut it takes more effort.

*[DR16000(ALL)01/95] Never hold the steering wheel to the extremeright or left for more than five seconds if theengine is running. This can damage the powersteering pump.

%*[DR16200(ALL)03/95] Brakes%*[DR16300(ALL)01/95] Applying the Brakes

[DR16350(ALL)07/93] Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes thatadjust automatically as the brake pads or liningswear down.

[DR16400(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle may have four-wheel anti-lock discbrakes which adjust automatically througheveryday use. Refer to section on anti-lockbrakes later in this chapter.

*[DR16700(ALL)05/95] Apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the”squeeze“ technique — push on the brake pedalwith a steadily increasing force. This allows thewheels to continue to roll while you are slowingdown, which lets you steer properly.


233

*[DR16800(ALL)05/95] If your vehicle does not have anti-lock brakes,extreme braking can make the wheels lock andslide, causing you to lose control of the steering.If the wheels lock, release the brake pedal andrepeat the ”squeeze“ technique.

*[DR16900(ALL)05/95] Do not drive with your foot resting on the brakepedal; you will wear out the linings and increaseyour vehicle’s stopping distance. Brake rotordamage may also eventually occur.


If you are driving down a long or steephill, shift to a lower gear. Do not applyyour brakes continuously, as they mayoverheat and become less effective.

*[DR17100(ALL)02/95] Occasional brake squeal during light to moderatestops does not affect the function of the brakesystem and is normal. However, if the squealbecomes annoyingly loud or increasessignificantly in frequency of occurrence, returnthe vehicle to your dealer for inspection.

[DR17200(ALL)09/89] The high-mount brakelamp will light when youapply the brakes.

[DR17300(ALL)05/95] Anti-lock Brake System(If equipped)

*[DR17325(ALL)11/94] Your vehicle may come with the optionalanti-lock brake system. Whenever your wheelsstart to lock (which could result in a skid) theanti-lock brake system prevents the lock-up byautomatically releasing and re-applying thebrakes. The brake pedal will pulsate as a resultof the automatic releasing and re-applying of thebrakes. In spite of this improvement in brakingperformance, you should continue to be cautiousin all hazardous driving situations, especiallywhen driving on hazardous road surfaces. Even


234

with your anti-lock brake system, you may nothave total control of your vehicle when brakingon roads with loose surfaces such as snow orgravel, holes in the pavement, or alternatingpatches of slippery and dry surfaces.

[DR17350(ALL)04/94] Each time you turn the ignition key to the ONposition, the anti-lock brake system will functionthrough one test cycle. When this happens, theanti-lock light (ABS) will come on for up to sixseconds. If the light stays on longer than sixseconds, shut off the engine and restart. If itremains on, it means the anti-lock brake systemis disabled and should be serviced immediatelyto restore the benefits of the anti-lock feature.Normal braking is not affected unless the redbrake warning light is also lit.

[DR17400(ALL)02/94] The anti-lock brake system has self-checkcapabilities. As described above, the systemturns on the anti-lock light each time you startyour engine. After the engine is started and theanti-lock light turns off, the system performsanother test the first time the vehicle reaches7 mph (11 km/h). The system turns on the ABSpump motor for approximately 1/2 second. Atthis time, a mechanical noise may be heard. Thisis a normal part of the self-check feature. If amalfunction is found during this check theanti-lock light will come on.

*[DR17500(ALL)08/95] Ford Motor Company has not found anynegative effects of mobile radio transmittingequipment installed on vehicles with the ABSsystem providing that the radio is installedaccording to the radio manufacturer’sinstructions. However, if you have had a mobileradio transmitter installed and the ABS lightcomes on (at any time other than immediately


235

after turning the key to the ON position) haveyour mobile radio dealer inspect the radioinstallation. Also, if the ABS system is activatedother than during maximum braking, have yourmobile radio installation checked.

%*[DR17800(ALL)03/95] Parking Brake

*[DR17900(ALL)01/95] The parking brake should be used wheneveryou park your vehicle.

[DR17950(ALL)06/93]


The parking brake lever (automatic transaxle shown)

*[DR18100(ALL)11/93] The parking brake lever is located between thefront seats. To set the parking brake, put yourfoot on the brake pedal while pulling theparking brake handle fully and firmly upward.

*[DR18300(ALL)12/89] To release the parking brake, put your foot onthe brake pedal, pull the handle upward andpush the button. Then lower the handle to thereleased position while holding the button in.


236


Always set the parking brake fully andmake sure that the gearshift is securelylatched in P (Park) (automatic transaxle) orin 1 (First) (manual transaxle).


Never leave your vehicle unattendedwhile it is running.

*[DR18600(ALL)03/95] Always check the Brake Warning Light eachtime you start your engine. Driving with theparking brake on will cause the brakes to wearout quickly and will reduce the fuel economy.


If the parking brake is fully released, butthe Brake System light remains on, havethe brakes checked immediately. Theymay not be working properly.


To prevent personal injury, do not releasethe parking brake while outside thevehicle.

*[DR19000(ALL)06/95] The parking brake is not designed to stop amoving vehicle, but you can use the parkingbrake to stop your vehicle in an emergency ifthe normal brakes fail. However, since theparking brake applies only the rear brakes, thestopping distance will increase greatly and thehandling of your vehicle will be adverselyaffected.


237

%*[DR19100(ALL)01/95] Driving Under Special Conditions%*[DR19200(ALL)01/95] Tips for Safe Driving

*[DR19300(ALL)07/95] As with any new vehicle, yours may drive andhandle differently from your previous vehicle.Use care until you become accustomed to itsvarious features and driving characteristics.

*[DR19400(ALL)03/95] Operate your vehicle within reasonable limits.Sudden acceleration, deceleration, turning, orcombinations of these maneuvers can cause avehicle to behave differently than anticipated.

[DR19500(ALL)02/95] ❑Extreme acceleration can cause the frontwheels to spin, perhaps resulting in reducedsteering control.

[DR19550(ALL)01/95] ❑ If you do not have anti-lock brakes, extremebraking can cause wheels to lock and slide,making it difficult to control the direction ofthe vehicle. Use the ”squeeze“ technique bypushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing force. This allows the wheels tobrake yet continue to roll so that you maysteer in the direction you want to travel. Ifyou lock the wheels, release the brake pedaland repeat the squeeze technique.

*[DR19700(ALL)02/95] ❑ If you abruptly release the accelerator orbrake hard while going too fast around asevere curve, your vehicle may changedirection. Avoid application of the brakes, ifpossible. If braking is necessary, it should bedone by using the ”squeeze“ techniquedescribed above.


238

%*[DR19750(ALL)01/95] Driving in Bad Weather

%*[DR19800(ALL)01/95] Slippery roads

*[DR19900(ALL)03/95] On some slippery road surfaces, front-wheeldrive may provide better acceleration thanrear-wheel drive. However, this does not meanthat your vehicle can stop any faster or anybetter than a vehicle with rear-wheel drive.Exercise the same caution while driving onslippery roads with your front-wheel drivevehicle as you would with a rear-wheel drivevehicle.

*[DR20000(ALL)03/95] Drive cautiously on wet or snowy roads:

*[DR20100(ALL)03/95] ❑Do not quickly move the steering wheelunless necessary.

*[DR20200(ALL)01/95] ❑Drive slower than you normally would.

*[DR20400(ALL)01/95] ❑Give your vehicle more distance to stop.

*[DR20500(ALL)03/92] ❑Pump the brake pedal steadily and evenly toavoid locking your wheels. (Does not applyto vehicles with anti-lock brakes.)

*[DR20600(ALL)02/93] ❑Consider using one of the lower gears.


To avoid losing control on slippery roads,do not downshift into 1 (First) with theautomatic transaxle when moving fasterthan 20 mph (32 km/h). Do not downshiftinto 1 (First) with the manual transaxlewhen moving faster than 10 mph(16 km/h).


239


If your vehicle has speed control, do notuse it on slippery roads. You could losecontrol of your vehicle and could injuresomeone.

*[DR20800(ALL)01/95] If you have an automatic transaxle and yourvehicle gets stuck (for example, in mud orsnow), you may try to ”rock“ it out of the spot.Shift, in a steady rhythm, between forward andreverse gears. While in each gear, press lightlyon the accelerator and release.


Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph(55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure apassenger or bystander.

*[DR21000(ALL)03/95] By moving the vehicle backward and forward,you may gain enough momentum to move outof the spot. Do not rock the vehicle for morethan a few minutes. This may overheat theengine, damage the transaxle, or damage thetires. If you are still stuck after a minute or twoof rocking, call for a tow truck.

%*[DR21200(ALL)01/95] High water

*[DR21300(ALL)01/95] Do not drive through flooded areas unless youare sure that the water is below the bottom ofthe wheel rims.

*[DR21400(ALL)04/94] If you must drive through high water, driveslowly. You may have limited traction or wetbrakes, so allow extra stopping distance becauseyour vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual.

*[DR21500(ALL)01/95] After you drive through the standing water,apply your brakes gently several times as yourvehicle moves slowly. This helps to dry thebrakes.


240

%*[DR21600(ALL)03/95] Driving With a Heavy Load

*[DR21700(ALL)03/94] There are limits to the amount of weight yourvehicle can carry. The total weight of yourvehicle, plus the weight of the passengers andcargo, should never be more than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weightthat your vehicle carries over the front axle andrear axle should never be more than the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respectiveaxle.

%*[DR21800(ALL)01/95] You can find your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWRon the Safety Compliance Certification Label onthe left front door lock facing or on the doorlatch post pillar.

[DR21900(ALL)10/91] Usage of replacement tires with a higher weightlimit than originals does not increase GVWR orGAWR. Usage of lower capacity replacementtires may lower GVWR and GAWR limitationsand is not recommended.


If the GVWR or the GAWR specified onthe Safety Compliance Certification Labelis exceeded, your vehicle may be damagedor you may lose control and injuresomeone.

*[DR30525(ALL)03/91] Towing Behind Another Vehicle —Recreational Vehicle

[DR30530(ALL)03/91] Towing an automatic transaxle vehicle behindanother vehicle, such as a Recreational Vehicle(RV), is not recommended unless a front wheeldolly is used. Do not tow your automatictransaxle with the front wheels on the ground ortransaxle damage may occur.


241

[DR30535(ALL)04/91] Towing a manual transaxle vehicle behindanother vehicle, such as a Recreational Vehicle(RV), is allowed only if towed in a forwarddirection with the front wheels on the ground.This is the only way to tow behind an RV withthe wheels on the ground without damage to thetransaxle.

[DR30537(ALL)10/91] When towing a vehicle with a manual transaxlewithout a front wheel dolly, the gear selectorshould be in neutral.


Never use a tow bar that attaches to thebumper when you tow your vehicle. Thiscould damage the bumper and cause anaccident.

%*[DR30550(ALL)04/95] Trailer Towing[DR30575(ALL)06/94] We do not advise using your vehicle for towing

a trailer.

%*[DR31700(ALL)01/95] Limiting Your Vehicle’s Load

[DR31800(ALL)07/93] The load that you add to your vehicle must notexceed the maximum load stated on the tireinformation decal attached to the face of theright rear door pillar.

*[DR31900(ALL)01/95] To figure the weight of your vehicle’s load, addthe weights of:

*[DR32000(ALL)01/95] ❑ the driver and passengers

*[DR32100(ALL)01/95] ❑ luggage and any other items that you put inyour vehicle

*[DR32300(ALL)01/95] ❑ the weight of any equipment that has beenadded to your vehicle since it was deliveredto your dealer


242

*[DR32400(ALL)01/95] If you do not know the actual weights of theseitems, use the following procedure to figure theweight of a load:

[DR32500(ALL)06/94] 1. Weigh your vehicle without the driver,passengers, and luggage. You might takeyour vehicle to a shipping company or aninspection station for trucks.

[DR32600(ALL)06/94] 2. Then weigh your vehicle with the driver,passengers, and luggage.

*[DR32700(ALL)01/95] 3. Subtract the first reading from the second tofigure the total weight of the load.

[DR32800(ALL)11/92] After determining this load, you must also makesure that the total weight of your vehicle, plusthe load it carries, is less than its GVWR. Also,make sure that the weight your vehicle carriesover each axle is less than the GAWR for therespective axle.

*[DR32900(ALL)07/93] If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargofrom your vehicle accordingly. If your vehicleexceeds either GAWR, shift the load or removecargo accordingly.


Improper distribution of your vehicle’sload or carrying weight in excess of theamount shown on the tire decal can causerapid tire wear or loss of vehicle control.


If the GVWR or the GAWR specified onthe Safety Compliance Certification Labelis exceeded, your vehicle may be damagedor you may lose control and injuresomeone.


243

Roadside Emergencies

%*[RE00380(ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting Your Vehicle[RE00390(ALL)01/92] Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave the

lights or any electrical equipment on after youturn the engine off. If this happens, you may beable to jump-start from a booster battery to startyour vehicle.

*[RE00400(ALL)02/95] RWARNING

The gases around the battery can explodeif exposed to flames, sparks, or litcigarettes. An explosion could result ininjury or vehicle damage.


To protect yourself when charging abattery, always shield your face and eyes.Make sure that you can breathe fresh air.

%*[RE00600(ALL)06/95] RWARNING

Applying too much pressure on the endswhen lifting a battery could cause acid tospill. Lift the battery with a carrier orwith your hands on the opposite corners.

%*[RE00700(ALL)07/95] RWARNING

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burnsskin, eyes, and clothing.

File:12ctree.exUpdate:Tue Sep 19 14:55:16 1995

244

*[RE00710(ALL)07/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, orclothing, immediately flush the area with waterfor at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows theacid, have him or her drink lots of milk or waterfirst, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, orvegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately.


To avoid damage or injury, follow thesedirections in the order they are given. Ifin doubt, call for road service.

*[RE01000(ALL)03/95] Preparing Your Vehicle

*[RE01100(ALL)03/95] 1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, soyou need to use a 12-volt jumper system.You will damage your starting motor,ignition system, and other electrical parts ifyou connect them to a 24-volt power supply(either two 12-volt batteries in series or a24-volt generator set).

*[RE01200(ALL)03/95] 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabledvehicle. You could damage the vehicle’selectrical system.

*[RE01300(ALL)04/95] 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood ofthe disabled vehicle. Make sure the vehiclesdo not touch each other. Set the parkingbrake on both vehicles and stay clear of theengine cooling fan and other moving parts.

*[RE01400(ALL)03/95] 4. Check all battery terminals and remove anyexcessive corrosion before you attach thejumper cables.

*[RE01600(ALL)02/95] 5. Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles.Turning on the fan helps protect theelectrical system from voltage surges. Turnoff all other switches and lights in bothvehicles to prevent possible damage to eithervehicle’s electrical systems.


245

%*[RE01700(ALL)05/95] Connecting the jumper cables

*[RE02500(ALL)03/95] 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal of the dischargedbattery. (You can connect either jumper cableto the positive (+) terminal, as long as youuse the same cable for both positiveterminals.) Most jumper cables have a redcable and a black cable. The red cable isgenerally used for the positive terminals andthe black for the negative ones.

*[RE02600(ALL)04/95] 2. Connect the other end of the first cable tothe positive (+) terminal of the boosterbattery.

*[RE02700(ALL)07/95] 3. Connect one end of the second cable to thenegative (S) terminal of the booster battery— NOT to the discharged battery.

*[RE02800(ALL)04/95] 4. Connect the other end of the second cable toa good metallic surface on the engine orframe of the disabled vehicle.


Do not connect the end of the secondcable to the negative (S) terminal of thebattery to be jumped. A spark may causean explosion of the gases that surroundthe battery.


246

[RE02910(ALL)12/91]

three fourths page art:0000885-B

The battery with jumper cables (1.8L engine)


247

[RE02920(ALL)12/91]

three fourths page art:0000889-A

The battery with jumper cables (1.9L engine)


248

*[RE03400(ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting

*[RE03600(ALL)03/95] 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not inthe way of moving engine parts, then startthe booster vehicle. Run the engine at amoderate speed.

*[RE03700(ALL)03/95] 2. Let the discharged battery charge for a fewminutes and then start the disabled vehicle.It may take a couple of tries before thevehicle starts. If the vehicle does not startafter several attempts, there may be adifferent problem.

*[RE03800(ALL)03/95] 3. When both vehicles are running, let themidle for a few minutes to charge thedischarged battery.

%*[RE03900(ALL)03/95] Removing jumper cables

*[RE04000(ALL)03/95] 1. Always remove the jumper cables in thereverse order. Remove the negative (S) endof the jumper cable from the metallic surfaceon the engine or frame of the disabledvehicle.

*[RE04100(ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the negative (S) cable from thebooster battery.

*[RE04200(ALL)06/95] 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from thebooster battery.

*[RE04300(ALL)05/95] 4. Remove the other end of the positive (+)cable from the discharged battery.

*[RE04400(ALL)04/95] After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a whileto let the engine “relearn” its idle conditions.Drive it around for a while with all electricalaccessories turned off to let the battery recharge.You may need to use a battery charger to fullyrecharge the battery.

*[RE04450(ALL)03/95] If you need to replace your battery, see Batteryin the Servicing Your Vehicle chapter.


249

%*[RE04500(ALL)03/95] Changing a Tire

*[RE04600(ALL)01/95] If you get a flat tire while you are driving, donot apply the brake heavily. Instead, graduallydecrease the speed. Hold the steering wheelfirmly and slowly move to a safe place on theside of the road. Park on a level spot, turn offthe ignition, set the parking brake, and turn onthe hazard flashers.

%*[RE04700(ALL)03/95] The Temporary Spare Tire

*[RE04800(ALL)03/95] You may have a high pressure temporary sparetire. This spare tire is smaller than a regular tireand is designed for emergency use only. Use itonly when you get a flat tire and replace it assoon as you can. This spare tire is marked withthe words “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so thatyou can easily identify it.


If you use the temporary spare tirecontinuously or do not follow theseprecautions, the tire could fail, causingyou to lose control of the vehicle, possiblyinjuring yourself or others.

*[RE05000(ALL)01/95] When you drive with the temporary spare tire,DO NOT:

*[RE05100(ALL)01/95] ❑exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under anycircumstances.

*[RE05200(ALL)01/95] ❑ load your vehicle so that it is heavier thanthe maximum vehicle load rating listed onthe tire decal.

*[RE05400(ALL)01/95] ❑use tire chains on this tire.


250

*[RE05500(ALL)01/95] ❑ try to repair the temporary spare tire orremove it from its wheel.

*[RE05600(ALL)01/95] ❑use the wheel for any other type of vehicle.

*[RE05700(ALL)01/95] ❑drive through an automatic car wash withthis tire. Because the temporary spare tire issmaller than a conventional tire, it reducesthe ground clearance. Your vehicle may getcaught in the rails and it could be damaged.

%*[RE06000(ALL)03/95] Spare Tire Location

[RE06025(ALL)03/95] The spare tire is stored under the carpet andboard in the luggage compartment.

[RE06150(ALL)02/94] You will find additional instructions for thespare tire on the wheel decal (located on thespare tire). The jack is stored on the right side ofthe trunk under the floor panel. Lift up the floorpanel for access to the spare tire.

[RE06175(ALL)01/92]


The location of the spare tire


251

%*[RE07400(ALL)03/95] Preparing to Change the Tire

*[RE07650(ALL)02/92] 1. Make sure that your vehicle will not moveor roll. If you have an automatic transaxle,put the gearshift in P (Park). If you have amanual transaxle, put the gearshift in 1(First). Set the parking brake and block thewheel that is diagonally opposite the tirethat you are changing.

*[RE08590(ALL)08/95] When one of the front wheels is off the ground,the transaxle alone will not prevent the vehiclefrom moving or slipping off the jack, even if thevehicle is in P (Automatic) or 1 (Manual). Toprevent the vehicle from moving when youchange one of the front tires, put a block behindthe wheel that is diagonally opposite the tire.


If the vehicle slips off the jack, you orsomeone else could be seriously injured.

*[RE08800(ALL)03/95] 2. Get out the spare tire and jack.

[RE08850(ALL)08/93] 3. Remove any optional wheel covers or centercaps covering the lug nuts by gently pryingwith the tapered end of the lug wrench.

[RE08870(ALL)09/89] 4. Loosen the wheel lug nuts one-half turneach, but do not remove them until the tireis raised off the ground. You should pull upon the handle rather than push to developmaximum force to loosen wheel lug nuts.

%*[RE08875(ALL)05/95] Removing and Replacing the Tire

[RE08880(ALL)03/95] 1. Place the scissors-type jack under the side ofthe vehicle and adjust the jack height withthe jack handle. The jack should fit underthe side sill. There are small notches in theseam to indicate the proper position for thejack.


252


To lessen the risk of personal injury, donot put any part of your body under thevehicle while changing a tire. Do not startthe engine when your vehicle is on thejack. The jack is only meant for changingthe tire.

[RE09825(ALL)08/95]

two third page art:0070180-D

The location for the jack (left rear trim panel shown)

[RE09850(ALL)03/95] 2. Insert the jack handle into the jack and turnit clockwise until the tire just clears theground. Remove the wheel lug nuts.


253

*[RE10390(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle has metric (12 mm) wheel studsand lug nuts. During wheel removal andreplacement, make certain that you use the samelug nuts to reinstall the wheel or replace themwith nuts of the same metric size and threading.


Installation of an English thread nut on ametric stud (or vice-versa) will notproperly secure the wheel to the hub.Damaged studs may result in wheelseparation and possible injury.

[RE12100(ALL)03/95] 3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.(TEMP. USE ONLY label facing outward.)

*[RE12200(ALL)03/95] 4. Reinstall the lug nuts, tightening until thewheel is snug against the hub. The bevelededges on the lug nuts face inward. Do notfully tighten the lug nuts until you lower thevehicle. If you do, you could force thevehicle off the jack.

*[RE12300(ALL)01/95] 5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise.


254

*[RE12400(ALL)06/95] 6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lugnuts in the order shown in the followingillustration.

[RE12550(ALL)12/91]


The lug nuts on the wheel

[RE12575(E )06/95] 7. Replace any wheel covers, ornaments, or hubcaps that your vehicle has. Line up the notchin the cover with the air valve on the tireand press on with the heel of your hand.(Some wheel covers have markings on theinside to point to the appropriate air valvenotch.) Make sure that they are snapped intoplace.


255

[RE12600(E )08/93]


Replacing optional wheel covers

*[RE12700(ALL)03/95] 8. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. Makesure the jack is securely fastened so it doesnot rattle when you drive.

*[RE12750(ALL)06/95] 9. Unblock the wheels.

%*[RE13000(ALL)03/95] Anti-Theft Wheel Lug Nuts (If equipped)

[RE13100(ALL)08/93] If your vehicle has “locking” lug nuts, one of thelug nuts on each wheel must be unlocked with aspecial key. The key and registration card arelocated in the tool bag with the lug wrench. Ifyou lose the key, send the registration card tothe manufacturer (not to the dealer) to get areplacement key.

*[RE13150(ALL)09/95] NOTE: DO NOT USE A POWER IMPACTWRENCH ON THE LUG NUT KEY.


256

[RE13200(ALL)06/93]


Anti-theft lug nut and key

*[RE13300(ALL)03/95] Removing the anti-theft lug nut

*[RE13500(ALL)03/95] Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Makesure that you hold the key square to the lug nut.If you hold the key on an angle, you maydamage the key and the lug nut.

*[RE13600(ALL)03/95] Place the lug nut wrench over the lug nut keyand apply pressure on the key with the wrench.Turn the wrench in a counterclockwise directionto remove the lug nut.

*[RE13650(ALL)09/95] Reinstalling the anti-theft lug nut

*[RE13700(ALL)03/95] Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Place thelug nut wrench over the lug nut key and, whileapplying pressure on the key, install the lug nut.

*[RE15100(ALL)12/91] If the Engine Cranks but DoesNot Start or Starting After aCollision

*[RE15150(ALL)07/95] The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch

*[RE15200(ALL)07/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or if youhave had a collision, the fuel pump shut-offswitch may have been triggered. The shut-offswitch is a device that stops the fuel pumpwhen your vehicle has been involved in asubstantial jolt.

*[RE15250(ALL)07/95] For information on how to check and reset thefuel pump shut-off switch, see Fuel pump shut-offswitch in the Index.


257

%*[RE16400(ALL)05/95] Towing Your Vehicle[RE16500(ALL)08/95] DO NOT TOW WITH SLINGBELT

EQUIPMENT. Ford Motor Company has notdeveloped or approved a T-hook or slingbelttowing procedure. It is recommended that yourvehicle be towed with wheel lift or flatbedequipment.

[RE16550(ALL)12/89]


Towing your vehicle


258

[RE16650(ALL)12/89]


Towing your vehicle on a flatbed truck


259

Customer Assistance

%*[HS00205(ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance

*[HS00210(ALL)08/95] Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour,seven-day-a-week hotline with trained operatorswho put you in touch with the help you need ifyou experience a problem with your vehicle.This complimentary service is provided to youthroughout your warranty period of 3 years or36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever comes first.To purchase Roadside Assistance coveragesbeyond this period (available through Ford AutoClub in the United States or Ford andLincoln-Mercury dealers in Canada), contactyour Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

*[HS00215(ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance will cover the following:

*[HS00220(ALL)06/94] ❑Mount your spare if you have a flat tire.

*[HS00225(ALL)06/94] ❑ Jump-start your battery if it is dead.

*[HS00230(ALL)06/94] ❑Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out.

*[HS00235(ALL)06/94] ❑Bring you fuel if you run out.

*[HS00240(ALL)06/94] ❑Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Evennon-warranty related tows, like accidents orgetting stuck in mud or snow, are covered(some exclusions apply, such as impoundtowing and repossession).

File:13cthse.exUpdate:Tue Sep 19 14:56:21 1995

260

*[HS00245(ALL)06/94] How to use Roadside Assistance

*[HS00250(ALL)06/94] Your Roadside Assistance identification card canbe found in the Owner Guide portfolio in yourglove compartment. Complete the card and placeit in your wallet for quick reference.

*[HS00255(ALL)04/95] To receive roadside assistance in the UnitedStates call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call1-800-665-2006).

*[HS00260(ALL)04/95] Should you need to arrange for roadsideassistance yourself, Ford Motor Company willreimburse the reasonable cost. To obtaininformation about reimbursement call1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006).

*[HS00300(ALL)01/95] If You Have a Service Problem

*[HS00400(ALL)01/95] Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford andLincoln-Mercury dealerships that can serviceyour vehicle for you. This chapter tells you howto get service or maintenance for your vehicle.

%*[HS00505(ALL)02/95] Service/Maintenance Concerns(U.S. or Canada)

*[HS00600(ALL)04/95] Ford recommends taking your vehicle to yourselling dealer who wants to ensure yourcontinued satisfaction. You may, however, takeyour vehicle to any authorized Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, yourdealer will be able to resolve your concern.

*[HS00700(ALL)04/95] If you are not satisfied with the service youreceived from your dealership’s servicedepartment, talk to the service manager at thedealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk tothe owner or general manager of the dealership.In most cases, you will have your concernresolved at this level.


261

*[HS01000(ALL)03/95] If you are away from home when your vehicleneeds to be serviced, or if you need more helpthan the dealer gave you, contact the FordCustomer Assistance Center to find anauthorized dealership that may be able to help.

*[HS01200(ALL)04/95] To process your request, the Ford CustomerAssistance Center needs the followinginformation:

*[HS01300(ALL)04/95] ❑your telephone number (both business andhome)

*[HS01400(ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer and the city where thedealership is located

*[HS01500(ALL)03/95] ❑ the year and make of your vehicle

*[HS01550(ALL)03/95] ❑ the date purchased

*[HS01600(ALL)03/95] ❑ the current mileage on your vehicle

*[HS01700(ALL)03/95] ❑your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)(listed on your owner card)

[HS01725(ALL)03/95] If you have questions or concerns with yourvehicle, please follow these steps:

*[HS01750(ALL)03/95] 1. Contact your Sales Representative or ServiceAdvisor at your selling/servicing dealership.

[HS01775(ALL)03/95] 2. If the inquiry or concern remains unresolved,contact the Sales Manager or ServiceManager at your selling/servicing dealership.

[HS01825(ALL)03/95] 3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolvedat the dealership level, contact the FordCustomer Assistance Center.


262

*[HS01850(ALL)03/95] In the United States, contact:

%*[HS01900(ALL)03/95]

one inch art:0060100-E

*[HS02000(ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions orconcerns that the dealership cannot answer,contact the Customer Assistance Centre.

%*[HS02100(ALL)04/95]

one inch art:0060101-C

*[HS02200(ALL)03/95] If you still have a service or product complaint,you may wish to contact the Dispute SettlementBoard (U.S. only) or the Canadian Motor VehicleArbitration Plan (CAMVAP) in Canada.

[HS02300(ALL)08/93] The Dispute Settlement Board(U.S. only)

*[HS02400(ALL)03/95] The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary,independent dispute-settlement programavailable free to owners or lessees of qualifyingFord Motor Company vehicles.

*[HS02500(ALL)01/95] The Dispute Settlement Board may not beavailable in all states. Ford Motor Companyreserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations, modify procedures and/or todiscontinue this process at any time withoutnotice and without incurring obligations.


263

*[HS02600(ALL)01/95] What Kind of Cases Does the BoardReview?

*[HS02700(ALL)08/95] The Board reviews unresolved warrantyperformance complaints on Ford, Mercury andLincoln cars and Ford and Mercury Light Trucksunder warranty that have not been resolved by adealer or Ford Motor Company.

*[HS02750(ALL)03/95] The Board does not review issues involving:

*[HS02800(ALL)01/95] ❑A non-Ford product

*[HS02900(ALL)01/95] ❑A non-Ford dealership

*[HS03100(ALL)01/95] ❑A vehicle sales transaction

*[HS03200(ALL)01/95] ❑A request for reimbursement of consequentialexpenses unless incidental to a service orproduct complaint being reviewed

*[HS03300(ALL)01/95] ❑ Items not covered by your warranty

*[HS03400(ALL)01/95] ❑Alleged liability claims

*[HS03450(ALL)01/95] ❑Property damage where such damage issignificant when compared to the economicloss alleged under the warranty dispute

*[HS03500(ALL)01/95] ❑Cases currently in litigation

*[HS03600(ALL)01/95] ❑Vehicles not used primarily for personal,family, or household purposes

*[HS03650(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles onwhich applicable express written newvehicle warranties have expired atreceipt of your application are noteligible. Eligibility may differaccording to state law. For example, seethe unique brochure for Californiapurchasers/lessees.


264

*[HS03700(ALL)04/95] How Does the Board Work?

*[HS03800(ALL)04/95] The Board has four members:

*[HS03900(ALL)04/95] ❑ three consumer representatives

*[HS04000(ALL)04/95] ❑a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer

*[HS04200(ALL)04/95] Consumer candidates for Board membership arerecruited and trained by an independentconsulting firm. Dealers are chosen because oftheir business leadership qualities.

*[HS04300(ALL)04/95] If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and36,000 miles of the date of delivery (warrantystart date), you have a right to make an oralpresentation before the Board by indicating yourchoice on the application. Also, oralpresentations may be requested by the Board. Adecision is made by the Board by simplemajority vote.

*[HS04350(ALL)04/95] Board members review all the materials relatedto each complaint and, based on the availableinformation, arrive at a fair and impartialdecision. Decisions are based on the writtenstatements and any oral presentations made byeach of the involved parties.

*[HS04400(ALL)04/95] Because the Board usually meets only once amonth, some cases will take longer than 30 daysto be reviewed. The Board will make everyeffort to resolve each case within 40 days after itreceives the customer application form.

*[HS04500(ALL)04/95] After your case has been reviewed, the Boardwill mail you its decision in writing. It will alsoprovide you with a form to indicate youracceptance or rejection of an award decision. Thedecisions of the Board are binding on the dealerand Ford, but customers may have other optionsavailable to them under state or federal law.


265

*[HS04600(ALL)04/95] The decisions of the Board, however, may beintroduced into evidence by any party insubsequent legal proceedings that may beinitiated.

*[HS04700(ALL)01/95] How Do You Contact the Board?

*[HS04800(ALL)03/95] Write to the Board to request abrochure/application:

*[HS04900(ALL)02/93]

one inch art:0060102-B

*[HS04950(ALL)02/95] You will be sent a brochure and a one-pagecustomer application form. To begin the Boardreview process, the form should be completedand mailed to the special Board P.O. Boxnumber shown above.

*[HS05100(ALL)04/95] What is the Review Process?

*[HS05200(ALL)04/95] Your application will be reviewed and if it isdetermined to be eligible, you will receive anacknowledgment indicating the file numberassigned to your application and the local Boardaddress. At the same time, your dealer and FordMotor Company representative are asked tosubmit statements.

*[HS05300(ALL)04/95] To review your case properly, the Board needsthe following information:

*[HS05400(ALL)04/95] ❑ legible copies of all documents andmaintenance or repair orders that relate tothe case

*[HS05500(ALL)08/95] ❑ the year, make, model, and vehicleidentification number (VIN)


266

*[HS05600(ALL)04/95] ❑ the date you bought your vehicle

*[HS05700(ALL)04/95] ❑ the date of repair and the mileage at the timeof repair

*[HS05800(ALL)04/95] ❑ the current mileage

*[HS05900(ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer who sold you thevehicle or who serviced your vehicle

*[HS06000(ALL)04/95] ❑a brief description of your unresolvedcomplaint

*[HS06100(ALL)05/95] ❑a brief summary of actions that were takenwith the dealer and Ford Motor Company

*[HS06200(ALL)05/95] ❑ the names (if known) of all people youcontacted at the dealership

*[HS06300(ALL)04/95] ❑a description of the action you want done toresolve your concern.

*[HS06305(ALL)07/95] Should your application NOT qualify for review,an explanation will be mailed to you.

*[HS06320(ALL)07/93] Reporting Safety Defects(U.S. only)

*[HS06340(ALL)01/95] If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford MotorCompany.

*[HS06360(ALL)01/95] If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, or FordMotor Company.


267

*[HS06380(ALL)01/95] To contact NHTSA, you may either call the AutoSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or writeto: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. Youcan also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

%*[HS06405(ALL)05/95] Ford of Canada CustomerAssistance

*[HS06415(ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions orconcerns that the dealership cannot answer,contact the Customer Assistance Centre.

*[HS06420(ALL)03/95]


*[HS06425(ALL)03/95] Please have the following information availablewhen contacting the Lincoln Centre:

*[HS06426(ALL)04/95] ❑your telephone number (both business andhome)

%*[HS06427(ALL)03/95] ❑your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)listed on your owner card and/or yourvehicle ownership license

*[HS06428(ALL)03/95] ❑ the year and make of your vehicle

*[HS06429(ALL)03/95] ❑ the date purchased

*[HS06430(ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer and the city where thedealership is located

*[HS06431(ALL)03/95] ❑ the current mileage on your vehicle


268

%*[HS06455(ALL)03/95] Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP)

*[HS06460(ALL)03/95] If a specific item of concern arises, where asolution cannot be reached between a vehicleowner, Ford of Canada, and/or one of itsdealers (that all parties can agree upon), theowner may wish to use the services offered bythe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP).

*[HS06465(ALL)08/95] CAMVAP uses the services of ProvincialAdministrators to assist consumers in schedulingand preparing for their arbitration hearings.However, before you can proceed withCAMVAP you must follow your manufacturer’sdispute resolution process as outlined underService/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or Canada)earlier in this chapter.

*[HS06470(ALL)05/95] Consumers wishing to obtain further informationabout the program can obtain an informationbooklet from your dealer or contact theProvincial Administrator, Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan, at the address ortelephone number shown below.

*[HS06475(ALL)05/95] O & P Services595 Bay Street — Suite 300Toronto, OntarioM5G 2C2Telephone 1 (800) 207-0685

[HS06480(ALL)08/95] This plan is not available in the province ofQuebec.


269

%*[HS06490(ALL)06/95] Getting Help Outside the U.S.and Canada

*[HS06500(ALL)06/95] Before you export your vehicle to a foreigncountry, contact the appropriate foreign embassyor consulate to make sure local regulations donot prevent you from registering your vehicle.Officials at the embassy can also help you decidewhether you should import your vehicle to thatcountry.

*[HS06600(ALL)06/95] Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell youwhere to get unleaded fuel. If you cannot getunleaded fuel or can get only fuel with ananti-knock index that is lower than your vehicleneeds, contact a district or owner relations officebefore you leave the U.S. or Canada.

*[HS06700(ALL)06/95] Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without aproper conversion may damage the effectivenessof your emissions control system and may causeengine knocking or serious engine damage. FordMotor Company is not responsible for anydamage that is caused by use of improper fuel.

*[HS06800(ALL)06/95] You may also have difficulty importing yourvehicle back into the U.S. if you use leaded fuel.

*[HS06900(ALL)06/95] If your vehicle must be serviced while you aretraveling or living in Central or South America,the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact thenearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannothelp you, write to:

*[HS07000(ALL)06/95]



270

*[HS07100(ALL)06/95] If you are in other foreign countries, contact thenearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannothelp you, they can direct you to the appropriateFord affiliate office.

*[HS07200(ALL)06/95] If you buy your vehicle in North America andthen relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada,register your Vehicle Identification Number andnew address with Ford Motor Company ExportOperations.


271

Accessories

*[AC00200(ALL)03/95] Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle[AC00240(ALL)06/95] Ford has many fine products available from

your dealer to clean your vehicle and protect itsfinishes. For best results, use the following, orproducts of equivalent quality.

[AC00280(ALL)08/95]

twelve pica chart:0001204-B

*[AC00300(ALL)04/95] A wide selection of accessories is availablethrough your local authorized dealer. These fineaccessories have been engineered specifically tofulfill your automotive needs. They are customdesigned to complement the style andaerodynamic appearance of your Ford-builtvehicle. In addition, each accessory is made fromhigh quality materials and meets or exceedsFord’s rigid engineering and safety specifications.That is why Ford brand accessories arewarranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles(60,000 km), whichever comes first. See yourdealer for complete warranty information andaccessory availability.

File:14ctace.exUpdate:Mon Sep 25 16:23:29 1995

272

[AC00325(ALL)08/93] NOTE: Not all accessories are available for allvehicle models.

*[AC00350(ALL)06/95] Safety, Comfort, and Convenience

[AC00530(ALL)08/95]

twenty-four pica chart:0070023-M


273

[AC00550(ALL)07/94]

sixteen pica chart:0070236-B

*[AC00600(ALL)01/95] NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment,passengers, and luggage to yourvehicle, do not exceed the total weightcapacity of the vehicle or of the frontor rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shownon the Safety Compliance CertificationLabel). Consult your dealer for specificweight information.

*[AC00700(ALL)05/95] NOTE: The Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) or the CanadianRadio Telecommunications Commission(CRTC) regulates the use of mobilecommunications systems — such astwo-way radios, telephones, and theftalarms — that are equipped with radiotransmitters. Any such equipmentinstalled in your vehicle should complywith FCC or CRTC regulations andshould be installed only by a qualifiedtechnician.


274

*[AC00800(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Mobile communications systems mayharm the operation of your vehicle,particularly if they are not properlydesigned for automotive use or are notproperly installed. For example, whenoperated, such systems may cause theengine to stumble or stall. In addition,such systems may themselves bedamaged or their operation affected byoperating your vehicle. (Citizens band[CB] transceivers, garage door openers,and other transmitters whose poweroutput is 5 watts or less will notordinarily affect your vehicle’soperation.)

*[AC00900(ALL)05/95] NOTE: Because we have no control over theinstallation, design, or manufacture ofsuch systems, Ford cannot assumeresponsibility for any adverse effects ordamage that may result if you use thisequipment.


276

[AC01000(E )09/95]

thirty-six pica chart:0070293-A


277

[AC01200(E )09/95]

thirty-six pica chart:0070294-A


278

[AC01400(E )09/95]

full page art:0070295-A


279

Servicing Your Escort

%*[SV00300(ALL)03/95] Service Made Easy

*[SV00400(ALL)01/95] Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle.

*[SV00500(ALL)01/95] 1. When we can, we design parts that do notneed to be serviced.

*[SV00600(ALL)01/95] 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle aseasy as possible. To help you:

*[SV00700(ALL)01/95] ❑We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow inthe engine compartment so that you can findthem easily.

*[SV00800(ALL)01/95] ❑When possible, we design parts — such asthe headlamp bulbs — that can be replacedwithout tools.

*[SV00900(ALL)05/94] ❑We give you a Maintenance Schedule thatmakes tracking routine service for yourvehicle easy. The maintenance schedule islocated in the Maintenance Schedule and Recordbooklet.

*[SV01000(ALL)01/95] This chapter tells you about the basic parts thatyou need to check and service regularly.

[SV01050(ALL)03/95] If your vehicle needs professional servicing, yourdealership can provide the parts and servicerequired. Check your Warranty Information Bookletto find out which parts and services are covered.Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of thisowner guide.

[SV01150(ALL)02/94] For more information concerning themaintenance and service of your vehicle, seeUnderstanding the Emission Control System in thischapter.

File:15ctsve.exUpdate:Tue Sep 19 14:37:50 1995

280

*[SV01250(ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company recommends that theOwner Maintenance Checks listed in theMaintenance Schedule and Record booklet beperformed for the proper operation of yourvehicle. In addition to the conditions listed inthe Owner Maintenance Checklist, be alert for anyunusual noise, vibration, or other indication thatyour vehicle may need service. If you do noticesomething unusual, see that your vehicle isserviced promptly.

*[SV01275(ALL)03/95] Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids,and service parts conforming to Fordspecifications. Motorcraft parts are designed andbuilt to provide the best performance in yourvehicle. Using these parts for replacement isyour assurance that Ford-built quality stays inyour vehicle.

%*[SV01300(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotivefluids in a responsible manner. Followyour community’s standards fordisposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find outabout recycling automotive fluids.

%*[SV01600(ALL)06/95] Precautions When Servicing YourVehicle

*[SV01700(ALL)06/95] Be especially careful when inspecting orservicing your vehicle. Here are some generalprecautions for your safety:

%*[SV01800(ALL)03/95] ❑Do not work on a hot engine. The enginecooling fan may come on unexpectedly.Always turn the engine off and let it cool.

*[SV01850(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The cooling fan is automatic and maycome on at any time. Always disconnectthe negative terminal of the battery beforeworking near the fan.


281

*[SV01900(ALL)06/95] ❑ If you must work with the engine running,avoid wearing loose clothing or jewelry thatcould get caught in moving parts. Takeappropriate precautions with long hair.

*[SV02000(ALL)06/95] ❑Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosedspace with the engine running, unless you aresure you have enough ventilation.

*[SV02100(ALL)08/95] ❑Never get under a vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If you must workunder a vehicle, use safety stands.

*[SV02200(ALL)06/95] ❑Keep all lit cigarettes and other smokingmaterials away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

[SV02250(ALL)03/95] If you disconnect the battery, the engine must“relearn” its idle conditions before your vehiclewill drive properly. To find out how the enginedoes this, see Starting your vehicle’s fuel-injectedengine in the Index.

*[SV02525(ALL)03/95] Working with the engine off:

[SV02550(ALL)03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make surethat the gearshift is securely latched in Park(automatic transaxle) or First (manualtransaxle).

*[SV02650(ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the key from the ignition after youturn the engine off.

*[SV02675(ALL)06/95] 3. Block the wheels. This will prevent yourvehicle from moving unexpectedly.


282

*[SV02700(ALL)03/95] Working with the engine on:

*[SV02825(ALL)04/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make surethe gearshift is securely latched in P (Park)(automatic transaxle) or Neutral (manualtransaxle).

*[SV02850(ALL)03/95] 2. Block the wheels. This will prevent yourvehicle from moving unexpectedly.


Do not start your engine with the aircleaner removed and do not remove itwhile the engine is running.

%*[SV03100(ALL)03/95] Opening the Hood

%*[SV03200(ALL)01/95] 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood releasehandle located under the bottom left cornerof the instrument panel.

%*[SV03300(ALL)02/95] 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release theauxiliary latch that is located under the hoodat the center of the vehicle.

[SV03350(ALL)09/89] 3. Lift the hood and secure it in the openposition with the prop rod.

*[SV04100(ALL)11/90] When you close the hood, make sure the proprod is in its retainer and that the hood latchessecurely.


283

[SV04125(ALL)08/92]


Th

eh

oodrelease

han

dle,

auxiliary

latch,

and

the

hood

prop

rod.

File:15ctsve.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:37:50 1995

284

[SV04175(ALL)08/95] RWARNING

Read and understand Precautions WhenServicing Your Vehicle at the beginning ofthis chapter before opening the hood.

%*[SV04500(ALL)04/95] Engine Compartment

*[SV04600(ALL)09/93] Your vehicle has one of these types of engines:

[SV05710(ALL)07/93] ❑a 1.9L SFI engine

[SV05725(ALL)07/93] ❑a 1.8L DOHC MFI engine

[SV05800(ALL)09/89] The following pages show diagrams of eachengine type and where to find items that youshould regularly service. The items mostfrequently checked or serviced by the owner willbe highlighted in yellow.


285

[SV05830(ALL)06/94]

threefourthspageart:0070032-B

Th

e1.9L

En

gine

File:15ctsve.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:37:50 1995

286

[SV05835(ALL)08/95]

threefourthspageart:0070053-C

Th

e1.8L

En

gine

File:15ctsve.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:37:50 1995

287

%*[SV05840(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Engine

*[SV05850(ALL)04/95] A clean engine is more efficient because abuildup of grease and dirt acts as an insulator,keeping the engine warmer than normal.

*[SV05860(ALL)07/95] ❑Extreme care must be used if a power washeris used to clean the engine. The high pressurefluid could penetrate sealed parts andassemblies causing damage or malfunctions.

*[SV05870(ALL)08/95] ❑ In order to avoid possible cracking of theengine block or fuel injection pump, do notspray a hot engine or injection pump withcold water.

*[SV05880(ALL)07/95] ❑The alternator, distributor and air intake mustbe covered. Covering these components willhelp prevent water damage.

*[SV05890(ALL)04/95] ❑Never wash or rinse the engine while it isrunning. Water getting into the engine maycause internal damage.

%*[SV06100(ALL)03/95] Filling the Fuel Tank[SV06110(ALL)01/92] The fuel filler door can be opened by pulling on

the finger hold located on the rear edge of thefuel filler door.

[SV06235(ALL)07/93] For your convenience, a fuel filler door locationindicator is included in your instrument cluster.It indicates which side of your vehicle containsthe fuel filler door.

[SV06275(ALL)08/95] The fuel filler door is outside the vehicle on thedriver side near the back.

[SV06300(ALL)03/95] 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF positionand remove the key. To remove the fuel cap,turn it counterclockwise.


288


If the fuel cap is venting vapor or if youhear a hissing sound, wait until it stopsbefore completely removing the cap.

*[SV06350(ALL)05/95] 2. Make sure that you pump unleaded fuel andput the nozzle all the way inside the fuelfiller pipe.

*[SV06375(ALL)05/95] 3. If you spill any fuel on the body of yourvehicle, clean it off immediately. The fuelmay dull or soften the paint if you do notwash it off.

*[SV06400(ALL)06/95] 4. Replace the fuel cap tightly when you arefinished. Turn it clockwise until you hear atleast three clicks. The ratcheting mechanismallows the fuel cap to be sealed withoutovertightening.

*[SV06425(ALL)05/95] 5. Push the fuel door closed.

*[SV06440(ALL)07/95] If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with anauthorized Motorcraft or equivalent part.

%*[SV06450(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If you do not use the proper fuel cap, thepressure in the fuel tank can damage thefuel system or cause it to work improperlyin a collision.

[SV06475(ALL)03/95] NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with anaftermarket fuel filler cap, the customerwarranty may be void for any damageto the tank and/or fuel system.


289

[SV07670(ALL)06/95] Choosing the Right Fuel

*[SV07680(ALL)06/95] Use only UNLEADED FUEL in your vehicle.Using leaded fuel is prohibited by federal law.Your warranty may not apply if your vehicle isdamaged because you used the wrong fuel.

*[SV07700(ALL)08/95] Vehicle inspection programs may detectmisfueling. Under these circumstances, you maybe required by law to make costly repairs atyour own expense.

%*[SV08750(ALL)05/95] Octane Recommendations

*[SV08800(ALL)06/95] Your vehicle is designed to use regular fuel withan octane rating of 87. In most cases it is notnecessary to use a fuel with an octane ratinghigher than 87. At service stations, the octanerating is displayed in a label on the pumps.

[SV08900(ALL)06/95]


*[SV08975(ALL)07/95] In some parts of the country, “regular” gradefuels are sold with octane ratings of 86 or evenless, especially in high altitude areas. Werecommend that you do not use these fuels.Always use a fuel with an octane rating of 87,even if it is sold as a “midgrade” or “premium.”

[SV08985(ALL)06/95] Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimesknocks lightly when you drive up a hill or whenyou accelerate. However, if a fuel with therecommended rating knocks heavily under alldriving conditions or knocks lightly driving atcruising speed on level roads, see your dealer ora qualified service technician. Persistent, heavyknocking can damage the engine.


290

*[SV09300(ALL)02/95] Fuel Quality

*[SV09475(ALL)06/95] If you are experiencing starting, rough idle orhesitation problems when the engine is cold, itmay be caused by fuel with low volatility. Try adifferent brand of fuel. If the condition persists,see your dealer or a qualified service technician.

*[SV09477(ALL)08/95] Using a high-quality fuel makes your vehiclemore responsive and maintains its good fueleconomy and emissions by:

*[SV09479(ALL)08/95] ❑protecting your fuel system from rusting.

[SV09481(ALL)06/95] ❑protecting your fuel lines from freezing.

*[SV09483(ALL)06/95] ❑ improving vehicle starting and warm-up.

*[SV09486(ALL)08/95] ❑protecting the fuel system from vapor lock invery hot weather, which causes the engine tohesitate or stall and makes restarts difficult.

*[SV09487(ALL)04/95] ❑minimizing deposits in fuel injectors,combustion chambers and on intake valves.

*[SV09489(ALL)06/95] ❑preventing the fuel system from “gummingup” when your vehicle is not used for longperiods of time.

*[SV09510(ALL)06/95] It should not be necessary to add anyaftermarket products to your fuel tank if youcontinue to use a high-quality fuel.

[SV09520(ALL)06/95] Gasolines for Clean Air%*[SV09530(ALL)04/95] Fuels in certain areas of the country are required

to contain oxygenates to improve air quality.Common oxygenates are ethanol or grain alcohol(blended at no more than 10%), methanol orwood alcohol (blended at no more than 5% withcosolvents and additives) and MTBE or methyltertiary butyl ether (blended at no more than15%).


291

*[SV09540(ALL)06/95] Reformulated fuel is also required in certainareas of the U.S. These fuels are designed tofurther reduce emissions from your vehicle.

*[SV09550(ALL)04/95] Generally, you should not experience difficultiesoperating your vehicle on reformulated gasolineor on fuels containing oxygenates. We encourageyou to use these fuels.

%*[SV10185(ALL)06/95] Safety Information Relating to AutomotiveFuels


Automotive fuels can cause serious injuryor death if misused or mishandled.

[SV10200(ALL)08/95] ❑Turn vehicle off when refueling

[SV10205(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not smoke when refueling. Fuels areextremely flammable.

[SV10210(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not siphon any fuel by mouth.


Gasoline or gasoline blended withmethanol can cause blindness andpossible death when swallowed. If anyfuel is swallowed, call a physician orpoison control center immediately.

[SV10220(ALL)08/95] ❑Avoid breathing vapors while refueling.

[SV10225(ALL)08/95] ❑ If fuel is splashed on the skin, wash withsoap and water.

[SV10230(ALL)08/95] ❑ If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contactlenses (if worn), flush with water for 15minutes, and seek medical attention.

*[SV10235(ALL)08/95] Gasoline and gasoline blends may contain smallamounts of carcinogens, such as benzene.Long-term exposure to unleaded gasoline vaporshas caused cancer in laboratory animals.


292

*[SV10237(ALL)08/95] If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” orother forms of disulfiram for the treatment ofalcoholism, vapor or skin contact with agasoline-methanol blend may cause the samekind of adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholicbeverage. In sensitive individuals, seriouspersonal injury or sickness could result. Consulta physician promptly if you experience anadverse reaction.

%*[SV11300(ALL)05/95] Running Out of Fuel

[SV11325(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Avoid running out of fuel because thissituation may have an adverse effect onmodern powertrain components.

[SV11350(ALL)08/95] If your vehicle runs out of fuel, try to stop onlevel ground away from traffic. The engine maybe restarted by adding at least one (1) gallon(four liters) of fuel to the fuel tank. If the vehicleis not level, up to three (3) gallons (12 liters) offuel may be required to start the engine.

*[SV11550(ALL)07/95] You may need to crank the engine several timesbefore the fuel system starts to pump fuel fromthe tank to the engine.


Never pour fuel in the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could result infire and personal injury.

%*[SV11600(ALL)05/95] Fuel Economy

*[SV11700(ALL)07/95] Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency ofyour vehicle and can be calculated as Miles PerGallon (MPG) or Liters Per 100 Kilometers(L/100K). Do not calculate the fuel economyduring your vehicle’s break-in period. Thiswould not be an accurate estimate of how muchfuel your vehicle will normally use.


293

*[SV11800(ALL)05/95] To calculate fuel economy:

*[SV11900(ALL)06/95] 1. Fill the tank completely and record theinitial odometer reading.

*[SV12000(ALL)06/95] 2. Every time you buy fuel record theamount (in gallons or liters) purchased.

[SV12150(ALL)08/95] 3. After at least three to five tankfuls, fill thefuel tank and record the final odometerreading.

*[SV12200(ALL)08/95] 4. Divide the total number of miles that youhave driven by the total number of gallonsthat your vehicle has used. In metric,multiply the number of liters used by 100and divide the answer by the number ofkilometers traveled. This will give you thenumber of liters used per 100 km.

%*[SV12300(ALL)08/95] Comparisons With EnvironmentalProtection Agency (EPA) and TransportCanada (TC) Fuel Economy Estimates

*[SV12400(ALL)05/95] EPA fuel economy figures are obtained fromlaboratory tests under simulated road conditionsand may not reflect the actual conditions youexperience or your style of driving. The EPAfuel economy estimate is not a guarantee thatyou will achieve the fuel economy shown.

%*[SV12500(ALL)08/95] Improving Fuel Economy

*[SV12510(ALL)05/95] Fuel economy is affected by a number ofvariables which can reduce efficiency. You canimprove fuel economy by understanding thesevariables and minimizing their effect.

*[SV12520(ALL)05/95] The following decrease fuel economy:

*[SV12530(ALL)05/95] ❑Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance

*[SV12540(ALL)05/95] ❑Excessive speed

*[SV12550(ALL)03/95] ❑Rapid acceleration


294

*[SV12560(ALL)05/95] ❑Driving with your foot on the brake

*[SV12570(ALL)05/95] ❑Sudden stops

*[SV12580(ALL)05/95] ❑Extended engine idling

*[SV12590(ALL)05/95] ❑Using speed control in hilly terrain

*[SV12610(ALL)05/95] ❑Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rearwindow defroster and other accessories

*[SV12620(ALL)05/95] ❑Underinflated tires

*[SV12630(ALL)05/95] ❑Heavy loads

*[SV12640(ALL)05/95] ❑Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski orluggage racks, bug deflectors, etc.

%*[SV13600(ALL)02/95] Engine Oil Recommendations

*[SV13610(ALL)03/95] We recommend using Motorcraft oil or anequivalent oil meeting Ford SpecificationESE-M2C153-E and displaying the AmericanPetroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK onthe front of the container.

*[SV13650(ALL)03/95]


The API Certification Mark

*[SV13670(ALL)01/95] Never use:

*[SV13680(ALL)01/95] ❑“Non-Detergent” oils

*[SV13690(ALL)04/95] ❑Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG

%*[SV13700(ALL)01/95] ❑Additional engine oil additives, oil treatmentsor engine treatments


295

%*[SV13710(ALL)03/95] Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity arePREFERRED for your vehicle. They provide thebest engine performance, fuel economy andengine protection for all climates down to -15˚F(-25˚C).

%*[SV13750(ALL)03/95] Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED andof the preferred viscosity may be used in yourengine. The engine oil and oil filter must still bechanged according to the maintenance schedule.

%*[SV13775(ALL)01/95] Checking and Adding Engine Oil

*[SV13800(ALL)03/95] Since the proper amount of engine oil isimportant for safe engine operation, check the oilusing the dipstick each time you put fuel inyour vehicle. Remember the engine must be off,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beparked on level ground.

%*[SV13900(ALL)04/95] Checking the engine oil level:

*[SV14000(ALL)02/95] 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed upand allow a few minutes for the engine oilto drain back into the oil pan.

*[SV14050(ALL)05/94] 2. Set the parking brake fully and make surethat the gearshift is securely latched in P(Park) (automatic transaxle) or 1 (First)(manual transaxle).

*[SV14100(ALL)02/95] 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engineheat.

*[SV14200(ALL)03/95] 4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted inyellow) and carefully pull it out of theengine.

*[SV14300(ALL)01/95] 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back intoposition, making sure it is fully seated.


296

[SV14400(ALL)06/93]


Engine oil dipstick (1.9L engine)

[SV14450(ALL)06/94]

one inch art:0070030-B

Engine oil dipstick (1.8L engine)

[SV14500(ALL)07/93] 6. Carefully pull the dipstick out again. If theoil level is below the “Add 1 qt.” or “L”line, add engine oil as necessary. If theengine oil is beyond the letter “F” or the“FULL” line, engine damage or high oilconsumption may occur and some oil mustbe removed from the engine.

*[SV14600(ALL)01/95] 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it isfully seated.

%*[SV14700(ALL)03/95] Adding engine oil

*[SV14800(ALL)01/95] It may be necessary to add some oil between oilchanges. Make sure you use a CERTIFIEDengine oil of the preferred viscosity. Yourvehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply ifengine damage is caused by the use of improperengine oil.

*[SV15000(ALL)03/95] Add engine oil through the oil filler caphighlighted in yellow. To add oil, remove thefiller cap and use a funnel to pour oil into theopening. Be careful not to overfill the engine.Recheck the oil level after you finish adding oil.


297

[SV17200(ALL)06/95]

10-1/2 pica art:0060618-C


Continuous contact with USED motor oilhas caused cancer in laboratory mice.

*[SV17280(ALL)07/95] Protect your skin by washing with soap andwater.

%*[SV17300(ALL)03/95] Engine Coolant%*[SV17350(ALL)09/95] Checking the Engine Coolant

*[SV17360(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understandPrecautions When Servicing YourVehicle at the beginning of this chapter.


The cooling fan is automatic and maycome on at any time. Always disconnectthe negative terminal of the battery beforeworking near the fan.

[SV17450(ALL)09/95] Check the engine coolant level in the enginecoolant recovery reservoir at least once a month.The coolant should be between the Full Hot andFull Cold marks on the reservoir. To locate thereservoir, see the diagram of your vehicle’sengine under Engine compartment in this chapter.


298


Do not put engine coolant in the containerfor the windshield washer fluid.

*[SV17460(ALL)09/95] If sprayed to clean the glass, engine coolant orantifreeze could make it difficult to see throughthe windshield.

[SV17475(ALL)05/94] NOTE: Additional illumination may be neededto see the coolant reservoir markingsclearly.

[SV17500(ALL)06/94]


The engine coolant reservoir

[SV17560(ALL)08/95] If the engine coolant has not been checked for along period of time the engine coolant reservoirmay eventually empty. If the engine coolantreservoir empties, check the engine coolant levelin the radiator. Read the following instructionsbefore removing the radiator cap. If it isnecessary to fill the radiator, refer to the RefillCapacities chart later in this chapter.


Failure to follow these instructions couldresult in serious personal injury from hotengine coolant or steam blowout and/ordamage to the engine cooling system orengine.


299

*[SV17570(ALL)09/95] 1. Before you remove the radiator cap, turn theengine off and let it cool. Even when theengine is cool, be careful when you removethe radiator cap.

*[SV17580(ALL)09/95] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick clotharound the cap and turn it slowlycounterclockwise to the first stop.

*[SV17590(ALL)09/95] 3. Step back while the pressure releases.

*[SV17600(ALL)09/95] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure hasbeen released, use the cloth to press, turn,and remove cap.

*[SV17610(ALL)09/95] 5. Stand away from the radiator opening. Hotsteam may blow out or hot engine coolantmay even splash out.

*[SV18100(ALL)08/95] Adding Engine Coolant


Never remove the coolant recovery capwhile the engine is running or hot.

*[SV18950(ALL)08/95] To find out how much engine coolant mixtureyour vehicle’s coolant system can hold, see Refillcapacities for fluids in the Index.

*[SV19350(ALL)02/95] Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid is anoptimized formula that will protect all metalsand rubber elastomers used in Ford engines forfour years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km). It is notnecessary and not recommended to usesupplemental coolant additives in your gasolinepowered vehicle. These additives may harmyour engine cooling system. Follow therecommended service interval for changing yourengine coolant.


300

*[SV19450(ALL)04/94] NOTE: When you change or add enginecoolant, it is important to maintainyour engine coolant concentrationbetween 40% (-11˚F [-24˚C]) and 60%(-62˚F [-52˚C]), depending on your localclimate conditions. Below 40% you willlose freeze protection and above 60%your engine may overheat on a warmday.

*[SV19452(ALL)03/95] NOTE: The use of an improper coolant mayvoid your warranty for the enginecooling system. Use only a premium,nationally recognized brand nameengine coolant. Do not use alcohol,methanol antifreeze or engine coolantmixed with alcohol or methanolantifreeze. If you do not use the propercoolant, the aluminum engine on yourvehicle will corrode.

*[SV19455(ALL)02/94] Ford Motor Company expressly authorizes theFord Rotunda engine coolant recycling processand chemicals. Use only Ford Rotunda recycledengine coolant or an equivalent non-FordRotunda recycled engine coolant that is certifiedby the supplier to meet Ford specificationESE-M97B44-A.


*[SV19460(ALL)03/95] Use Ford Premium Cooling System FluidE2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B)or an equivalent engine coolant that meets FordSpecification ESE-M97B44-A.


301

*[SV19480(ALL)04/93] Leave the engine coolant in all year. Make surethat the coolant will not freeze at thetemperature level in which you drive duringwinter months. Keep an engine coolant in yourengine that has a protection rating of at least-20˚F (-29˚C), or whatever protection rating isappropriate for the climate in which you live.

*[SV19900(ALL)02/95] You may add water by itself only in anemergency, but you should replace it with a50/50 mixture as soon as possible.

*[SV20000(ALL)01/95] Have your dealer check the engine coolingsystem for leaks if you have to add a quart(liter) of engine coolant more than once a month.

%*[SV20210(ALL)08/95] Checking Hoses

*[SV20220(ALL)01/93] Inspect all engine and heater system hoses fordeterioration, leaks and loose clamps beforeadding or replacing engine coolant. Makewhatever repairs or replacements are necessaryusing Motorcraft parts or their equivalents.

%*[SV21700(ALL)03/95] Windshield Washer Fluid andWipers

%*[SV21800(ALL)03/95] Washer Fluid

[SV22100(ALL)01/95] The windshield washer reservoir is located inthe engine compartment.


Do not put windshield washer fluid in thecontainer for the engine coolant.

%*[SV22500(ALL)01/95] Use specially formulated windshield washerfluid rather than plain water, because speciallyformulated washer fluids contain additives thatdissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washerfluids containing an appropriate antifreeze suchas methanol should be used in freezing weather


302

(temperatures below 32˚F [0˚C]). State or localregulations on Volatile Organic Compounds(VOC’s) may restrict use of the most commonantifreeze, methanol. Washer fluids containingnon-methanol antifreeze agents should be usedonly if they provide cold weather protectionwithout damaging the vehicle’s paint finish,wiper blades, and windshield washer system.

[SV22600(ALL)03/95] Washer Fluid for the Liftgate (Wagon only— if equipped)

[SV22625(ALL)10/89]


Location of the rear windshield washer reservoir

[SV22650(ALL)09/95] The wagon’s rear reservoir is located on thepassenger side of the storage compartment. Youmust remove the access cover to find the washerreservoir cap. The reservoir must be filled slowlyto allow air trapped in the reservoir to escape.

%*[SV23200(ALL)03/95] Wiper Blades

*[SV23300(ALL)03/95] Check the windshield wiper blades at least twicea year. Also check them whenever they seemless effective than usual. Substances such as treesap and some hot wax treatments used bycommercial car washes reduce the effectivenessof wiper blades.


303

*[SV23400(ALL)09/95] If the blades do not wipe properly, clean boththe windshield and the wiper blades. Useundiluted windshield washer solution or a milddetergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Donot use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents to clean your wiper blades. These willdamage your blades.

[SV23450(ALL)07/93] Inspect the wiper arm pivots on a regular basisto ensure that the wiper arms move freely.Lubricate the pivot points if necessary.

[SV23475(ALL)08/93]


Wiper arm pivot points

[SV23500(ALL)03/95] To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simplyturn the ignition switch to the ON position andturn the wipers on. Wait for them to reach avertical position and turn the ignition to OFF.Do not move the wipers manually. Manuallymoving the wipers across the windshield maydamage them.


304

*[SV23600(ALL)03/01] Wiper blade replacement

*[SV23700(ALL)09/95] If the wiper blades still do not work properlyafter you clean them, you may need to replacethe wiper blade assembly or the blade element.When replacing the wiper blade assembly, bladerefill, or wiper arm always use a Motorcraft partor equivalent.

[SV23750(ALL)08/93] NOTE: There are two different length wiperblades on your vehicle. The driver-sidewiper blade is 20 inches (50 cm) long,and the passenger-side wiper blade is17 inches (45 cm) long. Ensure that youinstall the correct size wiper blade inthe correct location.

[SV23755(ALL)08/95] To replace the wiper blades:

[SV23760(ALL)08/95] 1. Pull the wiper arm away from thewindshield and lock into the service position.

[SV23765(ALL)08/95] 2. Turn the blade at an angle from the wiperarm. Push the lock pin with a screwdriver torelase the blade and pull the wiper bladedown toward the windshield to remove itfrom the arm.

[SV23770(ALL)08/95] 3. Attach a new wiper blade to the wiper armand press it into place until you hear it click.


305

[SV23775(ALL)08/95]


Replacing the wiper blades


306

%*[SV23800(ALL)03/95] Tires

*[SV23900(ALL)03/95] Look at your tires each time you fill your fueltank. If one tire looks lower than the others,check the pressure in all of them. Always followthese precautions:

*[SV24200(ALL)03/95] ❑Keep your tires inflated to the recommendedpressures.

*[SV24300(ALL)02/95] ❑Stay within the recommended load limits (seeLoad limits in the Index).

*[SV24500(ALL)02/95] ❑Make sure the weight of your load is evenlydistributed.

*[SV24550(ALL)10/89] ❑Drive at safe speeds.

*[SV24700(ALL)01/95] If you do not take these precautions, your tiresmay fail or go flat.


Driving too fast for conditions creates thepossibility of loss of vehicle control.Driving at very high speeds for extendedperiods of time may result in damage tovehicle components.

%*[SV24925(ALL)05/95] At least once a month, check the pressure in allyour vehicle’s tires, including the spare. Use anaccurate tire pressure gauge. Check the tirepressure when tires are cold, after the vehiclehas been parked for at least one hour or hasbeen driven less than 3 miles (5 km). You canfind proper cold pressure and load limits ofrecommended size tires on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label.


307


Improperly inflated tires can affect vehiclehandling and can fail suddenly, possiblyresulting in loss of vehicle control.

%*[SV25100(ALL)02/95] Tire Rotation

*[SV25200(ALL)04/95] Because your vehicle’s front and rear tiresperform different jobs, they often weardifferently. To make sure your tires wear evenlyand last longer, rotate them as indicated in thefollowing diagram.

*[SV25300(ALL)04/95] Do not include the spare tire as part of yourrotation.

*[SV25350(ALL)03/95] For tire rotation intervals, see the MaintenanceSchedule and Record booklet. If you notice thetires wearing unevenly, have them checked.

[SV25410(E )08/92]


Rotating the tires


308

%*[SV25700(ALL)04/95] Replacing the Tires

*[SV25900(ALL)05/95] Replace any tires that show wear bands. Whenyour tire shows a wear band, it has only 1/16inch (2 mm) of tread left.

*[SV26150(ALL)09/89]


A worn-out tire

*[SV26175(ALL)01/95] Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly,you may need to replace them before a wearband appears across the entire tread. Some spotswear more heavily than others.


When replacing full size tires, never mixradial, bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Useonly the tire sizes that are listed on thetire pressure decal. Make sure that all tiresare the same size, speed rating, andload-carrying capacity. Use only the tirecombinations recommended on the decal.If you do not follow these precautions,your vehicle may not drive properly andsafely.

[SV26250(E )02/94] If you have the standard Escort 2-doorhatchback, the correct tire size for your vehicle isP175/70R13. If you have the Escort GT, thecorrect tire size for your vehicle is P185/60R15.


309

[SV26280(E )08/93] If you have an Escort LX 2-door hatchback, anEscort 4-door hatchback, an Escort wagon, or anEscort sedan, the correct tire size for yourvehicle is P175/65R14.

*[SV26400(ALL)01/95] Tires that are larger or smaller than yourvehicle’s original tires may also affect theaccuracy of your speedometer.

%*[SV26500(ALL)04/95] Wheel and Tire Matching

*[SV26550(ALL)03/95] See an authorized tire dealer for properservicing procedures. Wheels and tires must beproperly removed, matched and remounted tomaintain the best possible ride.

%*[SV27400(ALL)02/95] Information About Tire Quality Grades

*[SV27500(ALL)01/95] New vehicles are fitted with tires that have theirTire Quality Grade (described below) moldedinto the tire’s sidewall. These Tire QualityGrades are determined by standards that theUnited States Department of Transportation hasset.

*[SV27550(ALL)01/95] Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatictires for use on passenger cars. They do notapply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tireswith nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches orlimited production tires as defined in Title 49Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).

*[SV27600(ALL)01/95] U.S. Department of Transportation — Tirequality grades: The U.S. Department ofTransportation requires Ford to give you thefollowing information about tire grades exactlyas the government has written it.


310

%*[SV27799(ALL)01/95] Treadwear

*[SV27800(ALL)01/95] The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2)times as well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

*[SV27999(ALL)01/95] Traction A B C

*[SV28000(ALL)01/95] The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areA, B, and C, and they represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction performance.Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on braking (straightahead) traction testsand does not include cornering (turning)traction.

*[SV28299(ALL)01/95] Temperature A B C

*[SV28300(ALL)01/95] The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds toa level of performance which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A


311

represent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: The temperaturegrade for this tire is established for a tire that isproperly inflated and not overloaded. Excessivespeed, underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

%*[SV28500(ALL)04/95] Snow Tires and Chains

*[SV28600(ALL)01/95] The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treadsthat provide traction in rain or snow. However,during the winter months in some climates, youmay need to use snow tires and occasionallychains for your tires.


Snow tires must be the same size andgrade as the tires you currently have onyour vehicle.

*[SV28810(ALL)02/95] Use chains on the tires only in an emergency orif the law requires them where you live. If youchoose to use chains on your vehicle’s tires, beaware of the following:

*[SV28820(ALL)11/94] ❑Local regulations may prohibit or restrict theuse of tire chains. Investigate the laws andregulations in your area before installingchains.

*[SV28830(ALL)08/93] ❑Tire chains may scratch or chip aluminumwheels. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TIRECHAINS ARE INSTALLED ON STEELWHEELS ONLY. Be sure to remove wheelcovers (if equipped) from steel rims beforeusing tire chains to avoid scratches ordamage.

*[SV28850(E )06/93] ❑Do not use tire chains if you have the GTmodel.


312

*[SV28900(ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure the chains are the right size foryour tires. Use only SAE Class “S” chains.Other types may damage your vehicle.

[SV29010(ALL)06/93] ❑Put the chains on the front tires tightly withthe ends held down securely. Retighten thechains after driving 1/2 mile (0.8 km). Followthe chain manufacturer’s instructions.

*[SV29020(ALL)05/95] ❑Do not drive faster than 30 mph (50 km/h)or the chain manufacturer’s recommendedspeed limit, whichever is lower. Avoidbumps, holes and sharp turns. If you canhear the chains rub or bang against yourvehicle, remove the chains to prevent damageto your vehicle.

*[SV29030(ALL)11/94] ❑Tire chains may affect vehicle handling. Drivecarefully and avoid hard braking.

*[SV29040(ALL)11/94] ❑Do not use chains on temporary spare tires.They may damage the vehicle and the tire.

%*[SV29100(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Wheels

*[SV29120(ALL)05/95] Wash the wheels with the same detergent youuse to wash your vehicle’s body. Do not useacid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, abrasives,fuel, or strong detergents. These substances willdamage protective coatings. Use tar and road oilremover to remove grease and tar.

*[SV29140(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out ifthe brushes are abrasive.


313

%*[SV29210(ALL)03/95] Battery[SV29220(ALL)03/95] If the original equipment maintenance-free

battery is replaced, it may be replaced by alow-maintenance battery. See Motorcraft Parts atthe end of this chapter for the properreplacement battery.

*[SV29230(ALL)03/95] The low-maintenance battery has removable ventcaps for checking the electrolyte level andadding water. The electrolyte level should bechecked at least every 24 months or 24,000 miles(40,000 km) in temperatures up to 90˚F (32˚C)and more often in temperatures above 90˚F(32˚C). Keep the electrolyte level in each cell upto the level indicator. Do not overfill.

*[SV29240(ALL)03/95] If the level gets low, refill the battery withdistilled water. If necessary, you can add tapwater to the battery, provided the water is nothard or does not have a high mineral or alkalicontent. If the battery needs water quite often,have the charging system checked for a possiblemalfunction.

[SV29245(ALL)03/95] If you disconnect the battery, the engine must“relearn” its idle conditions before your vehiclewill drive properly. To find out how the enginedoes this, see Starting your vehicle’s fuel-injectedengine in the Index.

[SV29250(ALL)02/94] If the battery has been disconnected, you willhave to reset the clock and the preset stations onyour radio once the battery is reconnected.


314

%*[SV29255(ALL)03/95] Help Us Protect Our Environment

*[SV29260(ALL)04/95] Ford Motor Company strongly recommends thatused lead-acid batteries be returned to anauthorized recycling facility for disposal.

*[SV29265(ALL)03/95]


Battery recycling symbol

[SV29280(ALL)03/95] Because your vehicle’s engine is electronicallycontrolled by a computer, some controlconditions are maintained by power from thebattery. If you ever disconnect the battery orinstall a new battery, you must allow thecomputer to relearn its idle conditions beforeyour vehicle will drive properly. To begin thisprocess put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatictransaxle) or Neutral (manual transaxle), turn offall the accessories, and start the vehicle. Let theengine idle for at least one minute. Therelearning process will complete automatically asyou drive the vehicle.

*[SV29285(ALL)03/95] If you do not let the engine relearn its idle, theidle quality of your vehicle may be adverselyaffected until the idle is relearned. Your vehiclewill eventually relearn its idle while you driveit, but it takes much longer than if you use theprevious procedure.


315

%*[SV29300(ALL)05/95] Automatic Transaxle Fluid

*[SV29310(ALL)03/95] Under normal circumstances, you do not need tocheck the fluid level of the transaxle, since yourvehicle does not use up transaxle fluid. Refer tothe Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet forreplacement intervals. However, if the transaxleis not working properly — for instance, thetransaxle may slip or shift slowly, or you maynotice some sign of fluid leakage — the fluidlevel should be checked.

*[SV29335(ALL)01/95] NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for anextended period at high speeds, drivenin city traffic during hot weather, orhas been pulling a trailer, the vehicleshould be turned off for about 30minutes to allow the fluid to coolbefore checking.

%*[SV29340(ALL)02/93] Checking the Automatic Transaxle Fluid

[SV29345(ALL)03/95] It is preferable to check the transaxle fluid levelat normal operating temperature afterapproximately 20 miles (32 km) of driving.

*[SV29350(ALL)02/95] With the vehicle on a level surface and the brakepedal fully applied, start the engine and movethe gearshift selector through all of the gears.Allow sufficient time for each position to engage.Securely latch the gearshift selector in the P(Park) position. Fully set the parking brake andleave the engine running.

*[SV29370(ALL)01/95] Wipe off the dipstick cap and pull the dipstickout. Wipe the indicator end clean. Put thedipstick back into the filler tube and make sureit is fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and readthe fluid level.

[SV29392(ALL)12/89] When checking fluid at the normal operatingtemperature, the fluid level should be within thenormal operating temperature marks on the


316

dipstick. When the vehicle has not been driven,and outside temperatures are above 68˚F (20˚C),the fluid levels should be between the roomtemperature marks on the dipstick.

[SV29394(ALL)08/93]


Automatic transaxle fluid dipstick

[SV29396(ALL)12/89] NOTE: Your vehicle should not be driven ifthe outside temperature is above 68˚F(20˚C) and the fluid level is below theLow mark on the room temperaturescale.

%*[SV29400(ALL)01/95] Adding Automatic Transaxle Fluid

[SV29410(ALL)12/89] Before adding any fluid, be sure that the correcttype will be used.

[SV29420(ALL)01/95] Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25 L) increments throughthe filler tube to bring the level to the correctarea on the dipstick. If an overfill occurs, excessfluid should be removed by a qualifiedtechnician.

[SV29422(ALL)06/93] When you are finished adding fluid, be sure toput the dipstick back and ensure that it fitssnugly.


317


*[SV29800(ALL)01/89] Manual Transaxle Fluid

[SV29900(ALL)01/92] The lubricant level and quality should notdeteriorate under normal driving conditions.However, you should have the fluid levelchecked occasionally. If lubricant is required, seeLubricant specifications in the Index.

%*[SV30200(ALL)02/95] Brake Fluid

[SV30250(ALL)02/94] If you have a manual transaxle, the brake fluidreservoir in your vehicle includes the clutchfluid reservoir.

*[SV30300(ALL)03/95] Under normal circumstances, your vehicleshould not use up brake fluid rapidly. However,expect the level of the brake fluid to slowly fallas you put more mileage on your vehicle andthe brake pads wear.

%*[SV30400(ALL)06/93] You should check the brake fluid at everyscheduled engine oil change, but be sure tocheck it at least once a year. You can do this bylooking at the fluid level in the plastic reservoiron the master cylinder. (See The Engine Types inthis chapter to locate the master cylinder.) Thefluid level should be at or near the MAX mark.

[SV30425(ALL)03/95] If the brake fluid level is low, the brake warninglight in the instrument cluster will illuminate.


Brake fluid is toxic.


318

*[SV30460(ALL)07/95] If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes withrunning water for 15 minutes. Get medicalattention if irritation persists. If taken internally,drink water and induce vomiting. Get medicalattention immediately.

[SV30475(ALL)07/93]


Brake fluid master cylinder reservoir

%*[SV30500(ALL)02/95] If the fluid is low, carefully clean and removethe filler cap from the reservoir. Fill thereservoir to the MAX line with Ford HighPerformance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AAor DOT 3 equivalent fluid meeting Fordspecification ESA-M6C25-A.


If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT3, you will cause permanent damage toyour brakes.

*[SV30900(ALL)01/95] Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line.

[SV30950(ALL)06/93] NOTE: Avoid spilling brake fluid on paintedsurfaces.

*[SV31000(ALL)01/95] If you find that the fluid level is excessively low— below the seam or ridge on the outside of theplastic reservoir — have the brake systeminspected.


319


Do not let the reservoir for the mastercylinder run dry. This may cause thebrakes to fail.

%*[SV31200(ALL)02/95] Power Steering Fluid

*[SV31300(ALL)01/95] Check the level of the power steering fluid atleast twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall).

%*[SV31400(ALL)03/95] Checking and Adding Power SteeringFluid

*[SV31500(ALL)02/95] 1. Start the engine and let it run until thepower steering fluid reaches normaloperating temperature. The power steeringfluid will be at the right temperature whenthe engine coolant temperature gauge in theinstrument cluster is near the center of theNORMAL operating temperature range.

*[SV31600(ALL)01/95] 2. While the engine idles, turn the steeringwheel back and forth several times. Makesure that the cap assembly is installed at thistime.

*[SV31700(ALL)05/95] 3. Turn the engine off.

[SV31850(ALL)02/94] 4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. Thefluid level should be in between the F (Full)and L (Low) markings on the reservoir.

[SV32100(ALL)02/94] 5. If the power steering fluid is low, add fluidin small amounts, continuously checking thelevel until you reach the F (Full) range. Donot overfill. To find out how much fluidyour vehicle’s reservoir for the powersteering fluid will hold, see Refill capacities inthe Index.

[SV32150(ALL)03/95] 6. When you are finished, put the reservoir capback on and make sure that it fits snugly.


320

[SV32200(ALL)03/95] Use only power steering fluid that meets FordSpecification ESW-M2C33-F, such as MotorcraftType “F” Automatic Transmission and PowerSteering Fluid.

*[SV32700(ALL)01/95] If the power steering fluid is low, do not driveyour vehicle for a long period of time beforeadding fluid. This can damage the powersteering pump.

%*[SV33000(ALL)04/95] Fuses, Fuse Links and CircuitBreakers

[SV33025(ALL)07/93] Fuses, fuse links and circuit breakers protectyour vehicle electrical system from overloading.If electrical parts in your vehicle are notworking, the system may have been overloadedand blown a fuse, fuse link or tripped a circuitbreaker. Before you replace or repair anyelectrical parts, check the appropriate circuitprotector.

[SV33050(ALL)07/93] The following charts tell you which circuitprotector protects each electrical part of yourvehicle. If a fuse or fuse link blows, or a circuitbreaker opens a circuit, none of the parts ofyour vehicle that use the circuit will work. Forexample, if the RADIO fuse is blown, the radioand remote control mirrors will not work. If theradio works, but the electric mirrors don’t work,something is wrong with the mirrors.

[SV33100(ALL)06/93] NOTE: Fuse links should only be repaired byyour dealer.


321

*[SV33500(ALL)07/95] Fuses

[SV33550(ALL)08/95] If electrical parts in your vehicle are notworking, the system may have been overloadedand blown a fuse. If a fuse blows, all the partsof your vehicle that use the fuse will not work.

[SV33555(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle has two fuse panels. The interiorfuse panel is below the instrument panel in frontof the driver’s door. The main panel is underthe hood behind the battery.

[SV33569(ALL)06/93] The instrument panel fuse panel

[SV33570(ALL)08/95]


Fuse panel under instrument panel


322

[SV33575(ALL)08/95]


Inside of the instrument fuse panel cover


323

[SV33730(ALL)05/93]

Th

ein

strum

ent

pa

nel

fuses

an

dcircu

itbrea

kers

[SV33735(ALL)06/93]

thirty-sixpicachart:0070054-E

File:15ctsve.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:37:50 1995

324

[SV33738(ALL)09/95]

thirty-sixpicachart:0070084-F

File:15ctsve.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:37:50 1995

325

[SV33740(ALL)09/95]

thirty-sixpicachart:0070098-C

File:15ctsve.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:37:50 1995

326

[SV33742(ALL)06/93] The engine compartment fuse panel

[SV33744(ALL)09/95]


Engine compartment fuse panel (1.8 liter)


327

[SV33746(ALL)09/95]


Engine compartment fuse panel (1.9 liter)


328

[SV33750(ALL)12/89]

Th

een

gine

com

pa

rtmen

tfu

sep

an

elch

arts

[SV33775(ALL)05/94]

thirty-sixpicachart:0070055-D

File:15ctsve.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:37:50 1995

329

[SV33780(ALL)09/95]

thirty-sixpicachart:0070056-E

File:15ctsve.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:37:50 1995

330

[SV33800(ALL)09/95]

thirty-sixpicachart:0070097-B

File:15ctsve.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:37:50 1995

331

[SV33850(ALL)08/95] To remove and replace a fuse, use the fusepuller tool provided.

[SV33900(ALL)09/95]

quarter page art:0030248-C


Always replace a fuse with one that hasthe specified amperage rating. Using afuse with a higher amperage rating cancause severe wire damage and could starta fire.

[SV34000(ALL)08/95] To find a fuse’s amperage rating, check thenumber on the fuse or check the color.

[SV34025(ALL)09/95] Color coding for fuses

[SV34050(ALL)08/95]

fourteen pica chart:0070082-B


332

[SV34100(ALL)09/95] Even after you replace a fuse, it will continue toblow if you do not find what caused theoverload. If the fuse continues to blow, haveyour electrical system checked.

%*[SV34300(ALL)03/95] Circuit Breakers

[SV34425(ALL)08/95] Circuit breakers open when a circuit overloadexceeds their rated current (amperage). Themanual reset-type used for the blower motor canbe reset by pushing the red button located ontop of the circuit breaker. If the overload whichcaused the circuit breaker to open is still presentin the circuit, then the circuit breaker will openagain and the red button will pop out. Theoverload must be removed from the circuitbefore proceeding.

[SV34500(ALL)02/93] The non-cycling type used for power seats,power windows, and power door locks will stayopen once tripped until the overload is removed.

[SV34550(ALL)02/93] The circuit breaker chart

[SV34560(ALL)08/95]

six pica chart:0070011-B


Always replace a fuse with one that hasthe specified amperage rating. Using afuse with a higher amperage rating cancause severe wire damage and could starta fire.


333

%*[SV37500(ALL)03/95] Lights and Bulb Replacement

*[SV37600(ALL)01/95] It is a good idea to check the operation of thefollowing lights frequently:

*[SV37700(ALL)01/95] ❑headlamps

*[SV37750(ALL)02/95] ❑high-mount brakelamp

*[SV37800(ALL)01/95] ❑ tail lamps

*[SV37900(ALL)01/95] ❑brakelamps

*[SV38000(ALL)01/95] ❑hazard flasher

*[SV38100(ALL)01/95] ❑ turn signals

*[SV38200(ALL)01/95] ❑ side markers

*[SV38300(ALL)01/95] ❑ license plate lamp

[SV38325(E )08/95] ❑ fog lamps (if equipped)

%*[SV38400(ALL)01/95] The alignment of your headlamps should bechecked if:

*[SV38500(ALL)01/95] ❑oncoming motorists frequently signal you toturn off your vehicle’s high beams when youdo not have the high beams on

*[SV38600(ALL)01/95] ❑ the headlamps do not seem to give youenough light to see clearly at night

*[SV38700(ALL)01/95] ❑ the headlamp beams are pointed substantiallyaway from a position slightly down and tothe right


334

%*[SV38800(ALL)03/95] Headlamp Bulb

*[SV38900(ALL)01/95] The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceablebulbs. When the lamp burns out, simply replacethe bulb, rather than the whole lamp.


Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefullyand keep out of children’s reach. Graspthe bulb only by its plastic base and donot touch the glass. The oil from yourhand could cause the bulb to break thenext time the headlamps are operated.

*[SV39100(ALL)01/95] Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless youcan immediately replace it with a new one. If abulb is removed for an extended period of time,contaminants may enter the headlamp housingand affect its performance.

*[SV39300(ALL)03/95] Removing the headlamp bulb

*[SV39400(ALL)05/95] 1. Make sure that the headlamp knob is in theOFF position.

*[SV39500(ALL)02/95] 2. Lift the hood and find the bulb in theheadlamp socket.

[SV39550(ALL)09/89]


Location of the headlamp bulb


335

*[SV39801(ALL)02/95] 3. Remove the electrical connector from thebulb by pulling the connector.

*[SV40001(ALL)02/95] 4. Remove the bulb retaining ring by rotating itcounterclockwise (when viewed from therear) about an eighth of a turn to free itfrom the bulb socket, and by sliding the ringoff the plastic base. Keep the ring. It is to beused again to retain the new bulb.

*[SV40300(ALL)03/95] Installing the headlamp bulb

*[SV40400(ALL)02/95] 1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic basefacing upward, insert the glass end of thebulb into the socket. You may need to turnthe bulb left or right to line up the groovesin the plastic base with the tabs in thesocket. When the grooves are aligned, pushthe bulb into the socket until the plastic basecontacts the rear of the socket.

*[SV40500(ALL)08/95] 2. Slip the bulb retaining ring over the plasticbase until it contacts the rear of the socket.Lock the ring into the socket by rotating itclockwise until you feel a “stop.”

*[SV40600(ALL)02/95] 3. Push the electrical connector into the rear ofthe plastic base until it snaps, locking it intoposition.

*[SV40625(ALL)09/89] 4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure thatthey work properly. If the headlamp wascorrectly aligned before you changed bulbs,you should not need to align it again.


336

*[SV40650(ALL)01/95] High-Mount Brakelamp Bulb

[SV40655(ALL)08/95] Removing the brakelamp bulb

[SV40660(E )06/94]


Location of the high-mount brakelamp (GT hatchbackbrakelamp is on spoiler)

[SV40665(ALL)09/89] 1. Push in the center of each of the threemounting clips and pry each clip out.

[SV40670(ALL)02/94] 2. Remove the high-mount brakelamp cover.

[SV40675(ALL)09/89] 3. Remove the socket that contains theburned-out bulb and replace the bulb.

[SV40680(ALL)03/95] Installing the brakelamp bulb

[SV40685(ALL)09/89] 1. Push the bulb socket into the lamp assembly.

[SV40690(ALL)09/89] 2. Secure the cover with the mounting clips.


337

[SV40700(ALL)03/95] Replacing the brakelamp on a luggagecompartment with spoiler

[SV40710(ALL)08/93]


Location of the high-mount brakelamp on spoiler

[SV40725(ALL)03/91] 1. Remove the two retaining screws and thelens.

[SV40750(ALL)03/91] 2. Detach the socket from the housing andremove the bulb.

[SV40775(ALL)03/91] 3. Replace the bulb and ease the socket backinto the housing.

[SV40800(ALL)03/91] 4. Replace the lens and secure with theretaining screws.


338

[SV40820(ALL)03/95] Replacing a brakelamp mounted on thepackage tray in the rear window

[SV40825(ALL)08/93]


Location of the high-mount brakelamp in rear window

[SV40830(ALL)08/93] 1. Remove the two fastener clips and thebrakelamp assembly cover.

[SV40840(ALL)03/91] 2. Detach the socket from the housing andremove the bulb.

[SV40850(ALL)03/91] 3. Replace the bulb and ease the socket backinto the housing.

[SV40860(ALL)08/93] 4. Replace the brake assembly cover and securewith the two fastener clips.


339

*[SV40918(ALL)03/95] Bulb Specifications

[SV40920(E )08/95]

thirty-two pica chart:0070152-C


340

[SV40930(E )08/95]

fourteen pica chart:0070027-C

%*[SV41000(ALL)03/95] Emission Control System

*[SV41100(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a catalyticconverter which enables your vehicle to complywith applicable exhaust emission requirements.


Exhaust leaks may result in the entry ofharmful and potentially lethal fumes intothe passenger compartment. Underextreme conditions excessive exhausttemperatures could damage the fuelsystem, the interior floor covering, orother vehicle components, possiblycausing a fire.


341

*[SV41300(ALL)05/95] To make sure that the catalytic converter and theother emission control parts continue to workproperly:

*[SV41400(ALL)01/95] ❑Use only unleaded fuel.

*[SV41500(ALL)01/95] ❑Avoid running out of fuel.

*[SV41600(ALL)01/95] ❑Do not turn off the ignition while yourvehicle is moving, especially at high speeds.

*[SV41700(ALL)03/95] ❑Have the services listed in the MaintenanceSchedule and Record booklet performedaccording to the specified schedule. Thescheduled maintenance services are requiredbecause they are considered essential to thelife and performance of your vehicle and toits emissions system.

*[SV41720(ALL)03/95] In general, maintenance, replacement, or serviceof the emissions control devices or systems inyour new Ford Motor Company vehicle orengine may be performed at your expense byany automotive repair establishment orindividual using automotive parts equivalent tothose which your vehicle or engine wasoriginally equipped.

*[SV41750(ALL)05/95] If other than Ford or Motorcraft or Fordauthorized remanufactured parts are used formaintenance, replacement, or for the service ofcomponents affecting emissions control, theowner should be assured that such parts arewarranted by their manufacturer to beequivalent to genuine Ford Motor Companyparts in performance and durability. Pleaseconsult your warranty information booklet forcomplete warranty information.


342


Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle indry grass or other dry ground cover. Theemission system heats up the enginecompartment and exhaust system, whichcan start a fire.

*[SV42000(ALL)01/95] Do not make any unauthorized changes to yourvehicle or engine. Changes that cause moreunburned fuel to reach the exhaust system canincrease the temperature of the engine orexhaust system.

*[SV42100(ALL)01/95] By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs,services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, orsupervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted tointentionally remove an emission control deviceor prevent it from working. In some of theUnited States and in Canada, vehicle ownersmay be liable if their emission control device isremoved or is prevented from working.

[SV42200(ALL)08/95] Never use a metal exhaust collector when youservice your vehicle. If the metal collectorcontacts any of your vehicle’s plastic trim orbumper parts they could melt or deform.

*[SV42300(ALL)01/95] Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operateproperly. See your dealer if the engine runs onfor more than five seconds after you shut it offor if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires.

%*[SV42400(ALL)05/95] Information about your vehicle’s emissioncontrol system is on the Vehicle EmissionControl Information decal located on or near theengine. This decal identifies engine displacementand gives some tune-up specifications.


343

%*[SV42405(ALL)07/95] Readiness for Inspection/MaintenanceTesting

*[SV42410(ALL)07/95] In some localities it may become a legalrequirement to pass anInspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of theOn-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system. If thevehicle’s powertrain system or its battery hasjust been serviced, the OBD II system is reset toa not ready for I/M testing condition. Toprepare for I/M testing, the law specifies a“need for additional mixed city and highwaydriving to complete the check” of the OBD IIsystem. As soon as all of the OBD II systemchecks are successfully completed, the OBD IIsystem is set to the ready condition. The amountof driving required to reach the ready conditionvaries with individual driving patterns. Tocomplete this requirement in the minimumamount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycledefined below. If the vehicle owner cannot ordoes not want to do the additional drivingrequired by law, a service center can performthis drive cycle as it would any other type ofrepair work.

[SV42415(ALL)09/95] OBD II Drive Cycle (1.9L Engine only)

[SV42416(ALL)08/95] The following steps must be run in the ordershown. If any steps are interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode isacceptable between steps.

[SV42417(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Always drive vehicle in a safe manneraccording to traffic conditions and obeyall traffic laws.


344

*[SV42420(ALL)07/95] The engine must be warmed up and atoperating temperature before proceeding withthe drive modes of the following OBD II DriveCycle.

[SV42425(ALL)08/95] 1. Start the engine. Drive the vehicle or idle inneutral for 4 minutes.

[SV42430(ALL)08/95] 2. Idle the vehicle in D (drive) (neutral formanual transaxles) for 40 seconds.

[SV42435(ALL)08/95] 3. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 mph (55 km/h)(manual transaxles upshift from 1st to 3rdgear) at 1/2 to 3/4 throttle for 10 seconds.

[SV42440(ALL)08/95] 4. Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at35 mph (55 km/h) (manual transaxles use3rd gear) for 30 seconds.

[SV42445(ALL)08/95] 5. Idle the vehicle in D (drive) (neutral formanual transaxles) for 40 seconds.

[SV42450(ALL)08/95] 6. Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic atspeeds between 25 and 40 mph(40-64 km/h) (manual transaxles primarilyuse 3rd and 4th gear when possible) for 15minutes. During the 15 minute drive cyclethe following modes must be achieved:

*[SV42455(ALL)07/95] a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10seconds each

[SV42460(ALL)06/95] b. acceleration from idles at 1/2 to 3/4throttle position, and

*[SV42465(ALL)07/95] c. choose 3 different speeds to do 1.5minute steady state throttle drives.

[SV42470(ALL)08/95] 7. Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and60 mph (72-97 km/h) (manual transaxlesupshift to 5th gear). This should takeapproximately 5 minutes.


345

[SV42475(ALL)06/95] 8. Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady atthe selected speed between 45 and 60 mph(72-97 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes.

[SV42480(ALL)06/95] 9. Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varyingspeeds between 45 and 60 mph(72-97 km/h).

[SV42485(ALL)06/95] 10. Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in drivefor 40 seconds.

*[SV42490(ALL)07/95] 11. OBD II drive cycle has been completed.Vehicle can be turned off when convenient.

*[SV42500(ALL)07/95] Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts,and Lubricant Specifications

%*[SV42600(ALL)07/95] Refill Capacities

[SV42650(ALL)06/94]

sixteen pica chart:0070029-I


346

[SV42700(ALL)05/94]

eighteen pica chart:0070028-I


347

%*[SV42800(ALL)05/95] Motorcraft Parts

[SV42825(ALL)08/95]

eighteen pica chart:0070094-F

[SV42850(ALL)08/95] If an original 1.9L engine spark plug is removedfor examination, it must be reinstalled in thesame cylinder. Spark plugs in cylinders 1 and 3have a EG suffix. Spark plugs in cylinders 2 and4 have a E suffix. If a spark plug needs to bereplaced, use only spark plugs with the servicepart number suffix EE as shown on the enginedecal.


348

%*[SV43000(ALL)05/95]

Lu

brican

tS

pecification

s[SV43025(ALL)08/95]

thirty-sixpicachart:0070035-H

File:15ctsve.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:37:50 1995

349

[SV43050(ALL)06/95]

thirty-sixpicachart:0070036-H

File:15ctsve.exU

pdate:T

ue Sep 19 14:37:50 1995

350

%*[SV43100(ALL)01/95] Vehicle Storage

*[SV43200(ALL)01/95] Maintenance Tips

*[SV43300(ALL)01/95] If you plan on storing your vehicle for anextended period of time (60 days or more), referto the following maintenance recommendationsto ensure your vehicle stays in good operatingcondition.

*[SV43400(ALL)01/95] General

*[SV43500(ALL)01/95] ❑Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.

*[SV43600(ALL)01/95] ❑Protect from sunlight, if possible.

*[SV43700(ALL)01/95] ❑ If vehicles are stored outside, they requireregular maintenance to protect against rustand damage.

*[SV43800(ALL)01/95] Body

*[SV43900(ALL)01/95] ❑Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt,grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces,rear wheel housing and underside of frontfenders.

*[SV44000(ALL)01/95] ❑Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposedlocations.

*[SV44100(ALL)01/95] ❑Touch-up raw or primed metal to preventrust.

*[SV44200(ALL)01/95] ❑Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with athick coat of auto wax to preventdiscoloration. Re-wax as necessary when thevehicle is washed.

*[SV44300(ALL)04/95] ❑Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hingesand latches with a light grade oil.

*[SV44400(ALL)01/95] ❑Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading.

*[SV44500(ALL)01/95] ❑Keep all rubber parts free from oil andsolvents.


351

%*[SV44600(ALL)01/95] Engine

*[SV44700(ALL)01/95] ❑Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idleuntil it reaches normal operating temperature.

*[SV44800(ALL)01/95] ❑With your foot on the brake, shift through allthe gears while the engine is running.

%*[SV44900(ALL)01/95] Fuel system

%*[SV45000(ALL)07/94] ❑Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fueluntil the first automatic shutoff of the fuelpump nozzle.

*[SV45200(ALL)03/95] NOTE: During extended periods of vehiclestorage (60 days or more), fuel maydeteriorate due to oxidation. This candamage rubber and other polymers inthe fuel system and may also clogsmall orifices.

*[SV45300(ALL)01/95] Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added wheneveractual or expected storage periods exceed 60days. Follow the instructions on the label. Thevehicle should then be operated at idle speed tocirculate the additive throughout the fuel system.

*[SV45400(ALL)01/95] A volatile corrosion inhibitor added to the fuelsystem will protect the fuel system’s innersurfaces from corrosion. Follow the instructionspackaged with the product.

%*[SV45500(ALL)01/95] Cooling system

*[SV45600(ALL)01/95] ❑Protect against freezing temperatures.


352

%*[SV45700(ALL)01/95] Battery

*[SV45800(ALL)01/95] ❑Check and recharge as necessary.

*[SV45900(ALL)01/95] ❑Keep connections clean and covered with alight coat of grease.

%*[SV46000(ALL)01/95] Brakes

*[SV46100(ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure brakes and parking brake are fullyreleased.

%*[SV46200(ALL)01/95] Tires

*[SV46300(ALL)05/95] ❑Maintain recommended air pressure.

*[SV46400(ALL)01/95] Miscellaneous

*[SV46500(ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure all linkages, cables, levers andclevis pins under vehicle are covered withgrease to prevent rust.

*[SV46600(ALL)03/95] ❑Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15days to lubricate working parts and preventcorrosion.


353

[QI00570(ALL)09/95]


Front

Exterior

View

—2-D

oor

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

354

[QI00600(E)04/94]

fullpageart:0070222-A

Front

Exterior

View

—2-D

oor

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

355

[QI00700(E)04/94]


Front

Exterior

View

—4-D

oor

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

356

[QI00800(E)04/94]


Front

Exterior

View

—W

agon

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

357

[QI00850(E)06/94]


Front

Exterior

View

—4-D

oorH

atchb

ack

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

358

[QI00900(E)08/95]


Rear

Exterior

View

—2-D

oor

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

359

[QI01100(E)08/95]


Rear

Exterior

View

—4-D

oor

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

360

[QI01200(E)03/95]


Rear

Exterior

View

—W

agon

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

361

[QI01250(E)04/94]


Rear

Exterior

View

—4-D

oorH

atchb

ack

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

362

[QI01300(E)08/95]


En

trance

View

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

363

[QI01500(E)04/94]


Driver’s

Door

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

364

[QI01600(E)09/95]


Instru

men

tP

anel

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

365

[QI01900(E)04/94]


Instru

men

tC

luster

—S

port

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

366

[QI02000(E)03/95]


Instru

men

tC

luster

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

367

[QI02100(E)06/94]


Hatch

back

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

368

[QI02125(E)06/94]


Liftgate

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

369

[QI02300(E)09/95]


En

gine

comp

artmen

t—

1.8L

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

370

[QI02400(E)09/95]

fullpageart:0070138-D

En

gine

Com

partm

ent

—1.9L

File:16ctqie.exU

pdate:M

on Sep 25 16:58:31 1995

Index 371

Index

A

ABS warning light(see Anti-lock brake system) . . . . . . 127

Accessory position on the ignition . . . . 106Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . . . 294Air bag Supplemental

Restraint Systemand child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . 52description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . 123operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53passenger air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . 50proper seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51service and information labels . . . . . . 57tone generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56wearing safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Air cleaner filterlocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Antenna, radio(see Electronic sound system) . . . 157, 220

Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . 297Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Anti-theft lug nuts and key . . . . . . . 255Assistance (see Customer assistance) . . . 259Audio system

(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 197Autolamp system (see Headlamps) . . . . 152

File:ctixe.exUpdate:Tue Sep 19 15:00:54 1995

372 Index

Automatic transaxledriving with . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223fluid, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315fluid, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . 315fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 345fluid, specification . . . . . . . . . . . 348

BBacking up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Basic vehicle warranty . . . . . . . . . . . 4Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

acid, treating emergencies . . . . . . . 243charging system warning light . . . . . 121disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248how to service . . . . . . . . . . . . 313jumping a disabled battery . . . . . . . 243maintenance-free . . . . . . . . . . . 313proper disposal, recycling . . . . . . . 314replacement, specifications . . . . . . . 347servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 352

Brake fluidchecking and adding . . . . . . . . . 317description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 348

Brakesanti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233anti-lock brake system (ABS)

warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . 127applying the brakes . . . . . . . . . . 232fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . 317fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 348new brake linings . . . . . . . . . . . . 5noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317stopping distances. . . . . . . . . . . 238when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 352

Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Brights (high beams) . . . . . . . . . . . 160


Index 373

Bulbs, replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333halogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

CCanada, customer assistance . . . . . . . 267Canada, warranty information . . . . . . . 4Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan

(CAMVAP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Capacities for refilling fluids . . . . . . . 345Carbon monoxide in exhaust . . . . . . . 115Car seats for children

(see Child safety seats) . . . . . . . . . 60Cassette tape player

(see Electronic sound system) . . . 212, 217Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . 340CD player

(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 204Chains, tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Charging system warning light . . . . . . 121Child safety restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 58Child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 60automatic locking mode

(retractor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . . . . 80in rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Circuit breakerschecking and replacing . . . . . . . . 332

Cleaning your vehicleCD player and discs . . . . . . . . . 208chrome and aluminum parts . . . . . . . 7engine compartment . . . . . . . . . 287exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 153fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . 7, 137


374 Index

Cleaning your vehicle (continued)instrument panel lens . . . . . . . . . 158interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . 155plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153upholstery and interior trim . . . . . . 183washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Climate control system. . . . . . . . . . 137Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203, 218Clutch

fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . 317fluid specifications . . . . . . . . . . 349operation while driving . . . . . . . . 229shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Cold engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . 110Combination lap and shoulder belts . . . . . 9Compact disc player

(see Electronic sound system) . . . 198, 204Controls

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . 135mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Convenience kit in cargo area . . . . . . 250Coolant (see Engine coolant)

checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 297preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 351refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 345specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 130warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Crankcase emission filter . . . . . . . . . 347Cruise control (see Speed control) . . . . . 164


Index 375

Customer Assistance Center,Ford (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Customer Assistance Centre,Ford of Canada. . . . . . . . . . 262, 267

D

Dashboard (see Instrument panel) . . . . 135Daytime running light system . . . . . . 152Dipstick

automatic transaxle fluid . . . . . . . 315engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . 319

Disabled vehicle (see Towing) . . . . . . 257Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . 348Driving under special conditions

bad weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240high water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239slippery roads . . . . . . . . . . . . 238tips for safe driving. . . . . . . . . . 237towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

E

Electrical systemcircuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 332fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Electronic radio with cassette(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 213

Electronic sound systemantenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . 220tuning the radio . . . . . . . . . 199, 214warranty and service information . . . 222

Electronic stereo cassette radio(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 213


376 Index

Emergencies, roadsideassistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259battery acid spills . . . . . . . . . . . 243fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Emergency brake (parking brake) . . . . . 235Emission control system

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . 340emissions warranty . . . . . . . . . 4, 340

Enginecheck engine warning light . . . . . . 124does not start . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 113fuel injected engine, starting . . . . . . 108fuel pump shut-off switch . . . . . . . 113preparing to start . . . . . . . . . . . 108refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 345service points . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105starting after a collision . . . . . . . . 113storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 350

Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . 112Engine coolant

checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 297checking hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . 301disposal . . . . . . . . . . . 280, 300, 317preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 351recovery reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 297refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 345specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 130

Engine coolant temperature gaugedescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Engine fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Engine oil

checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 295dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295disposal . . . . . . . . . . . 280, 300, 317engine oil pressure warning light . . . . 128filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 347


Index 377

Engine oil (continued)refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 345specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 294, 348synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294“break-in” oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Exhaust fumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Extended Service Plan, Ford . . . . . . . . 4

F

Fanengine fan, avoiding injury . . . . . . 280

Flashers, hazard. . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Fluid refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . 345Ford Customer Assistance Center . . . . . 262Ford Extended Service Plan . . . . . . . . 4Ford Motor Company of Canada . . . . . 267Ford of Canada Customer

Assistance Centre . . . . . . . . . . . 267Foreign registration . . . . . . . . . . . 269French owner guides, how to obtain . . . . 3Fuel

calculating fuel economy . . . . . . . 292capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345comparisons with EPA fuel economy

estimates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293filling your vehicle with fuel. . . . . . 287filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 347fuel filler door release lever . . . . . . 287fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129improving fuel economy . . . . . . . 293octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . . 292safety information relating to

automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . . 291storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 351treating emergencies . . . . . . . . . 291


378 Index

Fuel capremoving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Fuel filler doorremote release . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . 347Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Fuel pump shut-off switch

engine does not start . . . . . . . . . 113starting after a collision . . . . . . . . 113

Fuseschecking and replacing . . . . . . . . 320circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

GGas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . . . . . 287Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) . . . . . 292Gasoline (see Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . 287Gauges

engine coolant temperature gauge . . . 130fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . 240location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Gearshiftautomatic operation . . . . . . . . . . 223downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231locking the gearshift. . . . . . . . . . 105positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224, 229shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . 224, 229

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . 240


Index 379

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)(continued)location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

H

Hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Headlamps

aiming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333checking alignment . . . . . . . . . . 333cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153daytime running lights . . . . . . . . 152replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 333turning on and off . . . . . . . . . . 151

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177High beams

indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . 122operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Hoodlatch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282lubrication specifications. . . . . . . . 348release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282working under the hood . . . . . . . 280

Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Hoses, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

I

Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) . . . 267Idle, relearning . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 280Ignition

positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . 105removing the key . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Indicator lights and chimes (see Lights) . . 119Infant seats (see Safety seats) . . . . . . . . 58Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Instrument panel

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158lighting up panel and interior . . . . . 153location of components . . . . . . . . 135


380 Index

JJack

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Jump-starting your vehicleattaching cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 243disconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . . 248

KKeys

positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . 105removing from the ignition . . . . . . 107stuck in lock position . . . . . . . 105, 107

LLamps

checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333daytime running light system . . . . . 152dome lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . 162headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151instrument panel, dimming . . . . . . 153interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . 153replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) . . 159Lights, warning and indicator

air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123anti-lock brakes (ABS) . . . . . . . . . 127charging system. . . . . . . . . . . . 121check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . 128hazard warning light . . . . . . . . . 162high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122turn signal indicator. . . . . . . . 127, 159

Load limitsGAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241


Index 381

Lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . 348Lug nuts

anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251tightening sequence . . . . . . . . . . 254

M

Maintenance schedule and record(see separate Maintenance Scheduleand Record booklet) . . . . . . . . . . 3

Maintenance (see Servicing) . . . . . . . 279Manual transaxle

backing up (reverse) . . . . . . . . . 229clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229shifting gears. . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Master cylinder, brakes . . . . . . . . . 317Methanol in fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Mileage, calculating fuel economy . . . . 292Mirrors

rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184side view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 184side view mirrors (manual) . . . . . . 185

Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Motorcraft parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

N

New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . 5

O

Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Odometer

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . . . 294Oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system . . . 343Order forms, service information . . . . . 275


382 Index

Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Overseas offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

P

Parking brakeoperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Parts (see Motorcraft Parts) . . . . . . . . 347PCV valve, specifications . . . . . . . . . 347Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Power features

door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Power steeringdipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319driving with power steering . . . . . . 232fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . 319fluid, refill capacity . . . . . . . . . . 345fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 348

Prop rod, hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

R

Radio (see Electronic sound systems) . . . 197Rear axle

lubricant specification . . . . . . . . . 349Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 301Refill capacities for fluids . . . . . . . . 345Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints)

adult. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 259Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . . . 243Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 307


Index 383

S

Safe driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Safety belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . 9Safety Compliance Certification Label . . . 240Safety information relating to

automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . . . 291Safety restraints

automatic locking mode(retractor) . . . . . . . . . . 25, 30, 34

cleaning the safety belts . . . . . . . . . 50extension assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 49for adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58for infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . . . . 9maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49proper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49untwisting or unjamming the

safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Safety seats for children

and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52automatic locking mode

(retractor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25in center rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . 86in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68in front seat (Canadian 2-door vehicles). . 63in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . . . . 80

Seat belts (see Safety restraints). . . . . . . 9Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 60cleaning upholstery . . . . . . . . . . 183head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Serial number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . 267Service concerns . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Servicing your vehicle

precautions when servicing . . . . . . 280servicing when you tow . . . . . . . . 257


384 Index

Shift positions (see Gearshift) . . . . . 224, 229Shoulder and lap belts

(see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . . . . 9Side mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Sliding moon roof (see Moon roof) . . . . 174Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . 311Spare tire

changing the tire . . . . . . . . . . . 249conventional spare . . . . . . . . . . 250finding the spare . . . . . . . . . . . 250removing the spare tire . . . . . . . . 250storing the flat tire . . . . . . . . . . 250temporary spare . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Spark plugs, specifications . . . . . . . . 347Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . 237Specification chart, lubricants . . . . . . . 348Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Starting your vehicle

preparing to start your vehicle . . . . . 108starting a cold engine . . . . . . . . . 110starting after a collision . . . . . . . . 113starting a warm engine . . . . . . . . 110starting your vehicle if the battery

is disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Steering, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Steering wheel

horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105speed controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 350Sunroof (moon roof) . . . . . . . . . . . 174Supplemental air bag readiness light . . . 123Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . 50


Index 385

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Tail lamps

bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 333cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Temperature control(see Climate control) . . . . . . . . . 137

Tireschanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249checking the pressure . . . . . . . . . 306cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312inspection and maintenance . . . . . . 306replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . 311spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 352tire grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 310wear bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308wheel and tire matching. . . . . . . . 309

Towing a trailer (see Trailer towing) . . . 241Towing your vehicle

using wheel dollies . . . . . . . . . . 257with a tow truck . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Trailer towingcalculating maximum trailer weight . . 241

Transaxleautomatic operation . . . . . . . . . . 223fluid, checking and adding

(automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . 315fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 345lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . 349

Transaxle control switch . . . . . . . . . 226Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Tune-up specifications (VECI) . . . . . . 342Turn signal

indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . 127, 159lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159


386 Index

U

Used engine oil, disposal . . . . . 280, 300, 317

V

VECI (Vehicle Emission ControlInformation) decal. . . . . . . . . . . 342

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . 267Vehicle loading

calculating the load . . . . . . . . . . 241understanding loading information . . . 240

Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Ventilating your vehicle

(see Climate control) . . . . . . . . . 137Viscosity (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . 294

W

Warm engine, starting . . . . . . . . . . 110Warning lights (see Lights) . . . . . . 117, 135Warranties

basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Warranty Information Booklet . . . . . . . 4Washer fluid

rear window reservoir . . . . . . . . . 302reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . . . . . 240Wheel and tire matching . . . . . . . . . 309Wheel bearings, lubricant specifications . . 349Wheel dollies (see Towing) . . . . . . . . 257


Index 387

Wheelsanti-theft lugnuts . . . . . . . . . . . 255cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251inspection and maintenance . . . . . . 306lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Windowsmanual windows, operating . . . . . . 172power windows, operating . . . . . . 173

Windshield washer fluid and wiperschecking and adding fluid . . . . . . . 301checking and replacing wiper blades . . 302liftgate reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 302reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 301, 349

Wrecker towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257


388

Service StationInformation

[GS00200(ALL)06/94]

twenty-eight pica chart:0070108-E

File:17ctgse.exUpdate:Tue Sep 19 15:00:43 1995

manual papu

Documents